You are on page 1of 578

GENEX Nastar GSM

User Manual

Contents

Contents
1 Overview...................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.2 So ftware Structure ............................................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.1.3 Networking Mode................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.1.4 Server/Client Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 1-9
1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 1-11
1.1.6 NE Version .......................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM ............................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.1 Application Scenarios ....................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.2.2 Application Modes ............................................................................................................................................ 1-13

2 Installation of the Nastar GSM ............................................................................................... 2-1


2.1 Introduction to the Installation .................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Requirements for User........................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.1.2 Flow Chart ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.2 Preparing the PNS.......................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server .............................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.2 Checking the System Environ ment .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.3 Installing the Related Software ................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server ................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.3.2 Installing the MSDE.......................................................................................................................................... 2-29
2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Co mponents.................................................................................................. 2-30
2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM................................................................................................................................ 2-33
2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory ................................................................................................................ 2-41
2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................................................................... 2-43
2.5.1 Flow Chart .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-43
2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Co mponents............................................................................................. 2-43
2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM .......................................................................................................................... 2-46
2.6 License Management................................................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.6.1 Installing the Dongle ......................................................................................................................................... 2-49
2.6.2 Updating the License ........................................................................................................................................ 2-50

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

3 GUI................................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Nastar GSM GUI ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI ...................................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Menu Bar .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.3 Toolbar................................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
3.1.4 Function Window .............................................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.1.5 Property Window ............................................................................................................................................... 3-20
3.1.6 Site View ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-21
3.2 GUI of the Transdata ................................................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata ...................................................................................................... 3-22
3.2.2 Menu Bar ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-23
3.2.3 Toolbar................................................................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.2.4 Project View ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.5 Main View........................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.2.6 Output Window.................................................................................................................................................. 3-28

4 Using the Transdata................................................................................................................... 4-1


4.1 Basic Operation .............................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
4.1.1 Start ing the SQL Server...................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Start ing the Transdata ......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.3 Closing the Transdata.......................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.2 NE Operations ................................................................................................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.1 Creat ing a Netwo rk ............................................................................................................................................. 4-6
4.2.2 Creat ing a BSC .................................................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC............................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.2.4 Delet ing a BSC .................................................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.2.5 Adding a PCU .................................................................................................................................................... 4-13
4.2.6 Delet ing a PCU .................................................................................................................................................. 4-15
4.2.7 Delet ing a Netwo rk ........................................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.2.8 Network Swap .................................................................................................................................................... 4-16
4.2.9 Version Matching............................................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.3 Data Management ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data ............................................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data ............................................................................................................... 4-23
4.3.3 Statically Import ing Perfo rmance Data ......................................................................................................... 4-25
4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data ................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.5 Delet ing History Data ....................................................................................................................................... 4-32
4.4 Task Management ........................................................................................................................................................ 4-33
4.4.1 In itializing a Task .............................................................................................................................................. 4-33
4.4.2 Backing Up a Task............................................................................................................................................. 4-34
4.4.3 Restoring a Task................................................................................................................................................. 4-36
4.5 Drawing Out Data and Importing Data File ............................................................................................................ 4-36

ii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

4.5.1 Drawing Out Data ............................................................................................................................................. 4-36


4.5.2 Importing Data File ........................................................................................................................................... 4-38
4.6 Transdata Maintainability Operat ion ........................................................................................................................ 4-40
4.6.1 Importing Data Warning Monitor ................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.6.2 Log ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-41

5 Common Operations ................................................................................................................. 5-1


5.1 Project Management ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management ......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Creat ing a Pro ject ................................................................................................................................................ 5-2
5.1.3 Opening a Pro ject ................................................................................................................................................ 5-5
5.1.4 Modify ing and Delet ing a Pro ject..................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2 Data Management .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management .................................................................................................................... 5-8
5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data ............................................................................................................... 5-11
5.2.3 Managing Pro ject Parameters .......................................................................................................................... 5-24
5.2.4 Management of Performance Data ................................................................................................................. 5-36
5.2.5 Checking Parameters ........................................................................................................................................ 5-42
5.3 User Management ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-48
5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights............................................................................................................... 5-49
5.3.2 Management of User Log................................................................................................................................. 5-50
5.4 Managing NEs .............................................................................................................................................................. 5-52
5.4.1 Creat ing a Site .................................................................................................................................................... 5-52
5.4.2 Ed iting a Site ...................................................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.4.3 Moving a Site ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.4 Delet ing a Site .................................................................................................................................................... 5-56
5.4.5 Delet ing a Cell ................................................................................................................................................... 5-57
5.4.6 Querying NE Property ...................................................................................................................................... 5-57
5.5 Managing Map ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-59
5.5.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................. 5-59
5.5.2 Importing a Map ................................................................................................................................................ 5-59
5.5.3 General Operat ion of a Map ............................................................................................................................ 5-61
5.5.4 Managing Map Layers ...................................................................................................................................... 5-63
5.5.5 Managing the Legend ....................................................................................................................................... 5-63
5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions ................................................................................................................................ 5-65
5.6.1 Setting the Time Range .................................................................................................................................... 5-65
5.6.2 Setting the Save Path ........................................................................................................................................ 5-65
5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 5-66
5.6.4 Setting the Co mmon Pe riod ............................................................................................................................. 5-78
5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronizat ion Mode ........................................................................................................... 5-78
5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups .......................................................................................................................................... 5-80
5.7 Processing the Analysis Result .................................................................................................................................. 5-84

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table........................................................................................................................... 5-85


5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart........................................................................................................................... 5-95

6 Optimizing the Network .......................................................................................................... 6-1


6.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Geographic Display ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Backg round........................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.2 Searching a Cell ................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area o r a Site ............................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.4 Displaying the Netwo rk Optimizat ion Theme .............................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid ........................................................................................................................... 6-15
6.2.6 Switching 900/ 1800 Layer ............................................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching ........................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map ...................................................................................................... 6-19
6.2.9 Modify ing Display Setting............................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.2.10 Map Legend...................................................................................................................................................... 6-28

7 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors.................................................................................. 7-1


7.1 verview ............................................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2 Obtaining the Optimization Data of Neighboring Cells.......................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 Creat ing the Data Co llect ion Task for Neighboring Cell Optimizat ion ..................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Setting Measurement Counters ......................................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.3 Obtaining Analysis Data of Neighboring Cell Optimization ....................................................................... 7-8
7.3 Task Analysis of Automatic Neighbor Optimizat ion ............................................................................................... 7-8
7.3.1 Importing a Measurement Task fo r Analysis .................................................................................................. 7-8
7.3.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis ................................................................................... 7-13
7.4 Procedures for Automatic Optimization of Neighbors .......................................................................................... 7-15
7.4.1 Manual Optimization ........................................................................................................................................ 7-15
7.4.2 Other Operat ions................................................................................................................................................ 7-18

8 Automatic Optimization of Frequency .................................................................................. 8-1


8.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Frequency Optimization ............................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.1 Importing a Measurement Task fo r Analysis .................................................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis ..................................................................................... 8-6
8.3 Expo rting the Result of Auto matic Frequency Optimizat ion ................................................................................. 8-9

9 Network Performance Alarms ................................................................................................. 9-1


9.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Types of Perfo rmance Alarm ....................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.2.1 Standard Alarm .................................................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2.2 Optional A larm..................................................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.2.3 Customizing an Alarm ...................................................................................................................................... 9-17
9.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms ................................................................................................... 9-18

iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

9.3.1 Start ing, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks ........................................................................................ 9-18


9.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks ...................................................................................................................................... 9-21
9.3.3 A larm Task Process ........................................................................................................................................... 9-22
9.3.4 Creat ing an Alarm Task .................................................................................................................................... 9-24
9.3.5 Delet ing an Alarm Task .................................................................................................................................... 9-27
9.3.6 Modify ing an Alarm Task ................................................................................................................................ 9-28
9.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task ............................................................................................................... 9-30
9.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for A larms ........................................................................................................ 9-32
9.4 Setting the Performance Alarms ................................................................................................................................ 9-34

10 Generating a Network Monitoring Report ....................................................................... 10-1


10.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report ........................................................................................................................ 10-2
10.2.1 Background ...................................................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2 Generat ing a Daily Report ............................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.3 Generat ing a Weekly Report........................................................................................................................10-10
10.2.4 Generat ing a Monthly Report......................................................................................................................10-14
10.2.5 Introduction to the Reports ..........................................................................................................................10-18
10.2.6 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report ..............................................................................10-26
10.3 Net work Monitoring Report ..................................................................................................................................10-26
10.3.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................................10-26
10.3.2 Generat ing the Network Monitoring Report.............................................................................................10-27
10.3.3 Report Description ........................................................................................................................................10-34
10.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report .................................................................................................................10-36
10.4.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................................10-36
10.4.2 Generat ing the PCU Perfo rmance Monitoring Report............................................................................10-37
10.4.3 Report Description ........................................................................................................................................10-39
10.5 Swap Co mparison Report ......................................................................................................................................10-44
10.5.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................................10-44
10.5.2 Generat ing the Swap Co mparis on Report.................................................................................................10-45
10.5.3 Report Description ........................................................................................................................................10-47
10.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics.....................................................................................................................................10-48
10.6.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................................10-48
10.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics ..................................................................................................10-49
10.6.3 Generat ing the Traffic Stat istic Report ......................................................................................................10-52
10.6.4 Report Description ........................................................................................................................................10-54

11 Further Locating Network Problems.................................................................................. 11-1


11.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................. 11-2
11.2 Analy zing the Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Background....................................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.2 Analy zing the Frequency Optimizat ion ....................................................................................................... 11-3
11.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report.............................................................................. 11-9

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

11.2.4 Configuration Check Report........................................................................................................................ 11-11


11.2.5 Configuration Parameters Co mparison Report ........................................................................................11-12
11.2.6 Geographical Display for Configurat ion Parameters ..............................................................................11-14
11.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project Parameters ............................................................11-14
11.3 Querying Performance Data ..................................................................................................................................11-14
11.3.1 Background.....................................................................................................................................................11-14
11.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline ...............................................................................................................11-14
11.3.3 Drawing Query Result ..................................................................................................................................11-14
11.3.4 Geographical Performance Gu ideline ........................................................................................................11-15
11.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line ....................................................................................11-15
11.4 Analy zing Performance...........................................................................................................................................11-16
11.4.1 Analy zing the KPI Performance .................................................................................................................11-16
11.4.2 Analy zing the Performance of PS KPIs .....................................................................................................11-35
11.4.3 Analy zing the Cell Accessibility .................................................................................................................11-36
11.4.4 Analy zing the Retainability Perfo rmance..................................................................................................11-38
11.4.5 Analy zing the Cell Mobility ........................................................................................................................11-40
11.5 Analy zing Frequency ..............................................................................................................................................11-44
11.5.1 Background.....................................................................................................................................................11-44
11.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel ..........................................................................................11-45
11.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC .........................................................................................................11-49
11.5.4 Checking Idle A RFCNS ...............................................................................................................................11-51
11.5.5 Checking Spectru m Utilizat ion Rate ..........................................................................................................11-52
11.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA ..................................................................................................................11-54
11.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization .............................................................................................................11-55
11.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report ..................................................................................11-58
11.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts.................................................................................................................11-59
11.6 Analy zing Neighbors...............................................................................................................................................11-61
11.6.1 Background.....................................................................................................................................................11-61
11.6.2 Checking Un idirect ional Neighbors ...........................................................................................................11-61
11.6.3 Maintaining Relat ion of Neighbors ............................................................................................................11-63
11.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation ................................................................................................................11-66
11.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format ............................................................................11-67
11.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation ......................................................................................................................11-71
11.6.7 Clearing Cell Neighbor Relat ion ................................................................................................................11-73
11.6.8 Analy zing the Redundant Neighbors .........................................................................................................11-75
11.6.9 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script.......................................................................................................11-76
11.7 Analy zing CHR ........................................................................................................................................................11-77
11.7.1 Analy zing CHR Access ................................................................................................................................11-77
11.7.2 Analy zing CHR Coverage............................................................................................................................11-80
11.7.3 Analy zing CHR Call Drop ...........................................................................................................................11-83
11.7.4 Analy zing CHR Vo ice ...................................................................................................................................11-87
11.8 Analy zing the TRX Performance ..........................................................................................................................11-91

vi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

11.8.1 Background.....................................................................................................................................................11-91
11.8.2 Analy zing the Measurement Report ...........................................................................................................11-91
11.8.3 Analy zing the TRX Level / Qual./TA/ Lin k Balance ................................................................................11-96
11.9 Analy zing Antenna & Feeder.................................................................................................................................11-98
11.9.1 Background.....................................................................................................................................................11-98
11.9.2 Procedures.......................................................................................................................................................11-98
11.10 Analy zing Auto Frequency Optimize...............................................................................................................11-103
11.10.1 Background ................................................................................................................................................11-103
11.10.2 Procedures ..................................................................................................................................................11-103
11.11 Analyzing Weak Coverage and Over Coverage .............................................................................................11-107
11.11.1 Background ................................................................................................................................................11-107
11.11.2 Procedures ..................................................................................................................................................11-107
11.12 Checking for TRX Hidden Fault .......................................................................................................................11-110
11.12.1 Background ................................................................................................................................................11-110
11.12.2 Procedures of TRX Hidden Fault Check...............................................................................................11-110

12 Predicting Network Trend ................................................................................................... 12-1


12.1 Net work Expansion Report ...................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.1 Background ...................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.2 Procedure .......................................................................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Analyzing Report of LA C Capacity ....................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.1 Background ...................................................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.2 Generat ing an LA C Capacity Analysis Report .......................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report ................................................................................12-12
12.3 Analyzing the Rad io Resource Utility Ratio .......................................................................................................12-13
12.3.1 Background ....................................................................................................................................................12-13
12.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell ..................................................................................................12-13
12.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells ..................................................................................................................12-15
12.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Id le Cells ....................................................................................................................12-16
12.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours .................................................................................................12-17

13 FAQ ........................................................................................................................................... 13-1


13.1 Installing Notice ......................................................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.1.1 MSDE is Reco mmended in the Stand-alone Version ................................................................................ 13-2
13.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar................................................................... 13-2
13.2 Problems of Running Program ................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.2.1 Problems Caused by Exp ired License ......................................................................................................... 13-3
13.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the Installation of the Nastar GSM 2.4 Hard
Dongle Version?........................................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed? ....................................................................................... 13-6
13.3 Problems of Import ing Data .................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.3.1 Ho w to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the Old Database After the Installation of the
Latest Version? ............................................................................................................................................................. 13-7

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

vii

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Contents

13.3.2 Ho w to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM
Version?......................................................................................................................................................................... 13-7
13.3.3 Import ing Performance Data Erro r .............................................................................................................. 13-8
13.3.4 Co mmon Problems in Performance Data Import....................................................................................... 13-9
13.4 Functional Problems................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Co mparison, Backup, and Recovery of Project Parameters ...........................13-10
13.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation ....................................................................................................................13-10
13.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relat ion..........................................................................................................................13-11
13.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify) ...........................................................................................................13-11
13.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors ..................................................................................................13-11
13.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and Common Operations ............................13-12
13.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported? .................................................................................13-14
13.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running?...............................................................................................................13-14
13.4.9 Language of Task Tree .................................................................................................................................13-15
13.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons .............................................................................................................................13-15
13.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be Displayed?......................................................13-15
13.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network Monitoring Report Stand For? ...............13-15
13.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in the Net work Monitoring Report Stand
For? ..............................................................................................................................................................................13-15
13.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and Network Opt imization Analysis ...............13-16
13.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters?
......................................................................................................................................................................................13-16
13.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rat ionality Check is inconsistent with That of Frequency Optimization
Check ...........................................................................................................................................................................13-16
13.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formu la of Non-Original in the Network Monitoring Report ......13-17
13.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Bo x Is Not the Related Function Dialog Bo x,
Why?............................................................................................................................................................................13-18
13.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the Vie w Can Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing?
......................................................................................................................................................................................13-18
13.5 Others.........................................................................................................................................................................13-22
13.5.1 Obtain ing the Data fro m the Earlier-Version ............................................................................................13-22
13.5.2 Fro m Tab File to MapX File ........................................................................................................................13-28
13.5.3 Imp lications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM ................................................................13-29

14 Acronyms and Abbreviations .............................................................................................. 14-1

viii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data fro m the M2000) ............................................. 1-5
Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data fro m the BAM) ................................................ 1-7
Figure 1-3 Workflo w of the Nastar GSM ...................................................................................................................... 1-10
Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM ..................................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box.................................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog bo x ............................................................................................ 2-7
Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Propert ies dialog bo x ...................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-5 In itial installation interface........................................................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-6 Installat ion type selection screen................................................................................................................. 2-11
Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar.......................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-8 Welco me d ialog bo x ...................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-9 Co mputer Name dialog bo x ......................................................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog bo x............................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-11 User Informat ion dialog box ...................................................................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-12 Soft ware License Agreement dialog bo x................................................................................................. 2-16
Figure 2-13 CD-Key d ialog bo x ..................................................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-14 Installation Definit ion dialog bo x ............................................................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog bo x ................................................................................................................................ 2-20
Figure 2-17 Select Co mponents dialog box .................................................................................................................. 2-21
Figure 2-18 Serv ices Accounts dialog box.................................................................................................................... 2-22
Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog bo x .................................................................................................................... 2-24
Figure 2-21 Net work Libraries dialog bo x.................................................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box .................................................................................................................. 2-26
Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box ......................................................................................................... 2-27

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 2-24 Setup Co mp lete dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 2-28


Figure 2-25 Welco me dialog box .................................................................................................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-26 Installation progress bar ............................................................................................................................. 2-29
Figure 2-27 Welco me dialog box .................................................................................................................................... 2-30
Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog bo x .................................................................................................................. 2-31
Figure 2-29 Setup Status progress dialog box .............................................................................................................. 2-32
Figure 2-30 InstallSh ield Wizard Co mp lete dialog bo x.............................................................................................. 2-33
Figure 2-31 Welco me to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog bo x ..................................................... 2-34
Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog bo x .................................................................................................................. 2-35
Figure 2-33 Customer Info rmation dialog bo x............................................................................................................. 2-36
Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog bo x ................................................................................................................................ 2-37
Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box................................................................................................. 2-38
Figure 2-36 Select Program Fo lder dialog bo x ............................................................................................................ 2-39
Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box .............................................................................................................................. 2-40
Figure 2-38 Maintenance Co mplete dialog bo x ........................................................................................................... 2-41
Figure 2-39 Flow chart o f uninstalling the Nastar GSM ............................................................................................ 2-43
Figure 2-40 Add or Remove Programs dialog bo x ...................................................................................................... 2-44
Figure 2-41 Welco me dialog box .................................................................................................................................... 2-45
Figure 2-42 Confirm Uninstall d ialog bo x .................................................................................................................... 2-45
Figure 2-43 Un install Co mplete dialog bo x.................................................................................................................. 2-46
Figure 2-44 Un installing the GENEX GSM d ialog bo x ............................................................................................. 2-47
Figure 2-45 Welco me dialog box .................................................................................................................................... 2-48
Figure 2-46 Confirm Uninstall d ialog bo x .................................................................................................................... 2-48
Figure 2-47 Un install Co mplete dialog bo x.................................................................................................................. 2-49
Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM .................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Figure 3-2 Menu bar............................................................................................................................................................ 3-3
Figure 3-3 Sub menus of the Project menu ...................................................................................................................... 3-4
Figure 3-4 Sub menus of the Frequency Analysis menu ............................................................................................... 3-5
Figure 3-5 Sub menus of the Neighbors Analysis menu................................................................................................ 3-5
Figure 3-6 Sub menus of the Analysis Reports menu .................................................................................................... 3-6
Figure 3-7 Sub menus of the Geographic Display menu ............................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-8 Sub menus of the View menu ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-9 Sub menus of the Window menu.................................................................................................................... 3-9

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 3-10 Help menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-9


Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar ................................................................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-12 Net work Optimizat ion toolbar................................................................................................................... 3-11
Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar ......................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar .................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Figure 3-15 Net work Element pane ............................................................................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE...................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Figure 3-17 Net work Monitor pane................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Figure 3-18 Net work Trend pane .................................................................................................................................... 3-17
Figure 3-19 Performance A larm pane ............................................................................................................................ 3-18
Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane ................................................................................................................................ 3-19
Figure 3-21 Property window.......................................................................................................................................... 3-20
Figure 3-22 Site View window........................................................................................................................................ 3-21
Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata ........................................................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-24 Menu bar ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-25 File menu....................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-26 View menu .................................................................................................................................................... 3-23
Figure 3-27 Tools menu.................................................................................................................................................... 3-24
Figure 3-28 Options dialog bo x ...................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3-29 Help menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Figure 3-30 Toolbar........................................................................................................................................................... 3-26
Figure 3-31 Project view .................................................................................................................................................. 3-27
Figure 3-32 Main v iew ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-27
Figure 3-33 Output window............................................................................................................................................. 3-28
Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog bo x .................................................................................................... 4-2
Figure 4-2 Login d ialog bo x .............................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Figure 4-3 Login d ialog bo x .............................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Figure 4-4 Main interface o f the Transdata ..................................................................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-5 Quit menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
Figure 4-6 Quit dialog bo x................................................................................................................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-7 Network In formation dialog bo x................................................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box .............................................................................................................................. 4-8
Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU ............................................................................................................................................ 4-9

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xi

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32 ........................................................................................................................................... 4-10


Figure 4-11 Creat ing BSC6000 ....................................................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-12 Information dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 4-11
Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog bo x............................................................................................................................ 4-12
Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................ 4-12
Figure 4-15 Add BSC\ PCU d ialog bo x.......................................................................................................................... 4-13
Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box.............................................................................................................................. 4-14
Figure 4-17 Success load message ................................................................................................................................. 4-14
Figure 4-18 Information dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-19 Confirmation dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................ 4-15
Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu .............................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Figure 4-21 Confirmation dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................ 4-16
Figure 4-22 Shortcut menu .............................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Figure 4-23 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box .......................................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-24 Swap success messages .............................................................................................................................. 4-18
Figure 4-25 Version Update dialog bo x ......................................................................................................................... 4-19
Figure 4-26 Selecting the upgrade package matched with the version .................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-27 Update Version successfully ...................................................................................................................... 4-20
Figure 4-28 BSC informat ion .......................................................................................................................................... 4-21
Figure 4-29 Button in the File Path colu mn .................................................................................................................. 4-21
Figure 4-30 Browse for Folder dialog box .................................................................................................................... 4-22
Figure 4-31 Successful import of configuration data .................................................................................................. 4-22
Figure 4-32 PCU informat ion dialog bo x...................................................................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-33 The button in file path................................................................................................................................. 4-23
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder ........................................................................................................................................ 4-24
Figure 4-35 Successful import of configuration data .................................................................................................. 4-24
Figure 4-36 Options dialog bo x ...................................................................................................................................... 4-25
Figure 4-37 Tasks Information dialog bo x .................................................................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-38 Check Task Time dialog bo x ..................................................................................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-39 Import success information ........................................................................................................................ 4-28
Figure 4-40 Created BSC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-29
Figure 4-41 Import Task setting dialog bo x .................................................................................................................. 4-29
Figure 4-42 Import Task setting dialog bo x .................................................................................................................. 4-30

xii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 4-43 dynamically import setting dialog box..................................................................................................... 4-31


Figure 4-44 The parameters can not be modified ........................................................................................................ 4-32
Figure 4-45 Shortcut menu .............................................................................................................................................. 4-32
Figure 4-46 Information dia log box ............................................................................................................................... 4-33
Figure 4-47 History Data dialog box.............................................................................................................................. 4-33
Figure 4-48 Shortcut menu .............................................................................................................................................. 4-34
Figure 4-49 Message displayed during task init ialization .......................................................................................... 4-34
Figure 4-50 Message of task backup .............................................................................................................................. 4-35
Figure 4-51 Message of task restore............................................................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-52 Draw out data ............................................................................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-53 Browse for Folder dialog box .................................................................................................................... 4-37
Figure 4-54 The pro mpt of drawing out data successfully ......................................................................................... 4-38
Figure 4-55 Data import ................................................................................................................................................... 4-39
Figure 4-56 Restore time select....................................................................................................................................... 4-39
Figure 4-57 The pro mpt of importing successfully ..................................................................................................... 4-40
Figure 4-58 Exception Watch .......................................................................................................................................... 4-40
Figure 4-59 Log Setting.................................................................................................................................................... 4-41
Figure 4-60 Browse for Folder ........................................................................................................................................ 4-42
Figure 5-1 Login d ialog bo x .............................................................................................................................................. 5-3
Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog bo x .............................................................................................................................. 5-3
Figure 5-3 New Pro ject dialog box................................................................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog bo x ............................................................................................ 5-4
Figure 5-5 Login d ialog bo x .............................................................................................................................................. 5-5
Figure 5-6 Project menu ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-7 Bro wse for Fo lder d ialog bo x ...................................................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-8 In formation dialog bo x ................................................................................................................................. 5-14
Figure 5-9 Progress bar..................................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-10 Total Records informat ion dialog bo x...................................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-11 Reloading cell in formation and Huawei neighbor relat ions wait progress bar ................................. 5-15
Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog bo x ................................................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-13 Browse for Folder dialog box .................................................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-14 Information dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box .................................................................................. 5-17

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 5-16 Information dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 5-18


Figure 5-17 Synchronizat ion Report dialog bo x .......................................................................................................... 5-19
Figure 5-18 Output result window.................................................................................................................................. 5-20
Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane ......................................................................................................... 5-21
Figure 5-20 Sub menu of export ing configuration parameters ................................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter tab le exported in an .xls file .......................................................................... 5-22
Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog bo x................................................................................................................ 5-23
Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file .................................................................................... 5-24
Figure 5-24 Open dialog bo x........................................................................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-25 Select Table d ialog bo x............................................................................................................................... 5-25
Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog bo x........................................................................................................................... 5-26
Figure 5-27 Confirming informat ion dialog box.......................................................................................................... 5-27
Figure 5-28 Successfully import ing the project parameter ........................................................................................ 5-27
Figure 5-29 Output dialog bo x ........................................................................................................................................ 5-28
Figure 5-30 Co mpare project parameters menu ........................................................................................................... 5-29
Figure 5-31 Result of co mparing project parameters .................................................................................................. 5-30
Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet............................................................................................................................. 5-31
Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet ............................................................................................................................... 5-31
Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet .............................................................................................................. 5-32
Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter d ialog bo x ...................................................................................................... 5-33
Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter d ialog bo x ...................................................................................................... 5-34
Figure 5-37 Information bo x after you upload the project parameters..................................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-38 Information bo x after you download the project parameters ............................................................... 5-35
Figure 5-39 Data Backup command............................................................................................................................... 5-37
Figure 5-40 Browse for Folder dialog box .................................................................................................................... 5-38
Figure 5-41 Progress bar .................................................................................................................................................. 5-38
Figure 5-42 Data backup co mplete d ialog bo x............................................................................................................. 5-39
Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu ................................................................................................................................ 5-40
Figure 5-44 Browse for Folder dialog box .................................................................................................................... 5-41
Figure 5-45 Progress bar .................................................................................................................................................. 5-41
Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog bo x ............................................................................................................. 5-41
Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check d ialog bo x ...................................................................... 5-42
Figure 5-48 Browse for Folder dialog box .................................................................................................................... 5-43

xiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page ............................................................................................................... 5-44


Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file ................................................................................. 5-45
Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting ....................................................................................................................... 5-46
Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file ........................................... 5-47
Figure 5-53 User Management dialog bo x.................................................................................................................... 5-49
Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box ........................................................................................................... 5-50
Figure 5-55 User Log dialog bo x.................................................................................................................................... 5-51
Figure 5-56 Site Edit d ialog bo x ..................................................................................................................................... 5-53
Figure 5-57 Cell Informat ion tab page........................................................................................................................... 5-54
Figure 5-58 Site Edit d ialog bo x ..................................................................................................................................... 5-55
Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation....................................................................................... 5-56
Figure 5-60 Confirmation dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................ 5-56
Figure 5-61 Confirmation dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................ 5-57
Figure 5-62 Property window.......................................................................................................................................... 5-58
Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog bo x .................................................................................................................. 5-59
Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box ............................................................................................................................. 5-60
Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog bo x ..................................................................................................... 5-61
Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar .......................................................................................................................................... 5-61
Figure 5-67 Layer Control d ialog bo x ........................................................................................................................... 5-63
Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis ............................................................................... 5-64
Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking ............................................................................... 5-64
Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder ....................................................................................................................................... 5-66
Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box................................................................................................................................. 5-67
Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog bo x ....................................................................................................................... 5-68
Figure 5-73 Cell Group dialog box................................................................................................................................. 5-69
Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog bo x ........................................................................................................................ 5-70
Figure 5-75 Cell Group dialog box................................................................................................................................. 5-71
Figure 5-76 Cell Group..................................................................................................................................................... 5-72
Figure 5-77 Cell group...................................................................................................................................................... 5-73
Figure 5-78 Open ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-74
Figure 5-79 Select table .................................................................................................................................................... 5-74
Figure 5-80 Import Setting............................................................................................................................................... 5-75
Figure 5-81 Import Setting............................................................................................................................................... 5-76

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 5-82 Cell group repeated ..................................................................................................................................... 5-76


Figure 5-83 Import information ...................................................................................................................................... 5-77
Figure 5-84 Import ing cell group files ........................................................................................................................... 5-77
Figure 5-85 Co mmon Period Setting dialog bo x ......................................................................................................... 5-78
Figure 5-86 Data Synchronization Setting dialog bo x ................................................................................................ 5-79
Figure 5-87 Synchronizat ion Report dialog bo x .......................................................................................................... 5-79
Figure 5-88 BSC Group dialog box................................................................................................................................ 5-80
Figure 5-89 New BSC Group dialog bo x ...................................................................................................................... 5-81
Figure 5-90 BSC Group dialog box................................................................................................................................ 5-82
Figure 5-91 BSC Group Edit d ialog bo x ....................................................................................................................... 5-83
Figure 5-92 BSC Group dialog box................................................................................................................................ 5-84
Figure 5-93 Delete BSC group ........................................................................................................................................ 5-84
Figure 5-94 Qu ick Draw Setting dialog box ................................................................................................................. 5-85
Figure 5-95 Qu ick drawing .............................................................................................................................................. 5-86
Figure 5-96 Su m o f a selected row ................................................................................................................................. 5-88
Figure 5-97 Result sorting................................................................................................................................................ 5-89
Figure 5-98 Filtering query results ................................................................................................................................. 5-90
Figure 5-99 Stretching window....................................................................................................................................... 5-91
Figure 5-100 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu .................................................................................................. 5-92
Figure 5-101 Draw Selected Colu mn on Map option ................................................................................................. 5-93
Figure 5-102 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box .............................................................................. 5-94
Figure 5-103 Geographical display of performance data ........................................................................................... 5-95
Figure 5-104 Quick drawing............................................................................................................................................ 5-96
Figure 5-105 Chart analysis menu .................................................................................................................................. 5-98
Figure 5-106 Legend ......................................................................................................................................................... 5-99
Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog bo x .................................................................................................................................. 6-3
Figure 6-2 searching a cell ................................................................................................................................................. 6-4
Figure 6-3 Location area d isplaying setting dialog box................................................................................................ 6-5
Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog bo x................................................................................................................................. 6-6
Figure 6-5 LA C displayed on the map ............................................................................................................................. 6-7
Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box.................................................................................................................................. 6-8
Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map .............................................................................................................. 6-9
Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box.................................................................................................................. 6-10

xv i

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog bo x............................................................................................................................... 6-10


Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map.................................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-11 A ll sites displayed on the map ................................................................................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-12 Display Netwo rk Optimizat ion Theme Setting menu ........................................................................... 6-13
Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box ............................................................................................................................. 6-13
Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme ................................................................................................................ 6-15
Figure 6-15 Reference grid .............................................................................................................................................. 6-16
Figure 6-16 900 M Hz layer.............................................................................................................................................. 6-17
Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer ........................................................................................................................................... 6-18
Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog bo x......................................................................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box ............................................................................................................................. 6-20
Figure 6-20 Display on the map ...................................................................................................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box .................................................................................................................. 6-22
Figure 6-22 Option dialog bo x ........................................................................................................................................ 6-23
Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label................................................................................................................. 6-24
Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box............................................................................................................................... 6-25
Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box ........................................................................................................ 6-26
Figure 6-26 Property window.......................................................................................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-27 Add Map Mark ............................................................................................................................................. 6-28
Figure 6-28 Map Mark...................................................................................................................................................... 6-29
Figure 7-1 Task Management dialog bo x ........................................................................................................................ 7-3
Figure 7-2 New Task dialog box ....................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-3 Setting start time, end time, and period for the task .................................................................................. 7-5
Figure 7-4 Setting parameters fo r the new task.............................................................................................................. 7-6
Figure 7-5 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors dialog bo x ..................................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-6 Selecting a measurement task file for automatic neighboring cell optimization ................................ 7-10
Figure 7-7 In formation about the imported measurement task.................................................................................. 7-11
Figure 7-8 Advanced Setting dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 7-12
Figure 7-9 Analysis result ................................................................................................................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-10 Manually setting a measurement task ...................................................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-11 Task informat ion about the manually entered measurement task ........................................................ 7-14
Figure 7-12 Defined neighbors and undefined neighbors .......................................................................................... 7-15
Figure 7-13 Selecting a defined neighbor ..................................................................................................................... 7-16

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xv ii

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 7-14 Operat ion result............................................................................................................................................ 7-16


Figure 7-15 Selecting an undefined neighbor............................................................................................................... 7-17
Figure 7-16 Operat ion result............................................................................................................................................ 7-17
Figure 7-17 Result of bulk optimizat ion........................................................................................................................ 7-18
Figure 7-18 Export ing optimization data of neighbors ............................................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-19 Legends of automatic optimizat ion of neighbors ................................................................................... 7-19
Figure 8-1 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency dialog box ..................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-2 Selecting a measurement task for auto matic frequency optimization ..................................................... 8-4
Figure 8-3 Task informat ion .............................................................................................................................................. 8-5
Figure 8-4 Advanced Setting dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-5 Result of automat ic frequency optimizat ion ............................................................................................... 8-6
Figure 8-6 Manual Task d ialog bo x.................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Figure 8-7 Task informat ion .............................................................................................................................................. 8-8
Figure 8-8 Expo rting the result of automatic frequency optimization ....................................................................... 8-9
Figure 9-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree .............................................................................................................. 9-3
Figure 9-2 Modify alarm task............................................................................................................................................ 9-4
Figure 9-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell A larm Parameter Setting dialog bo x.................................................. 9-5
Figure 9-4 A larm condition setting................................................................................................................................... 9-6
Figure 9-5 A larm condition setting modified.................................................................................................................. 9-7
Figure 9-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box....................................................... 9-8
Figure 9-7 A larm condition setting dialog box............................................................................................................... 9-9
Figure 9-8 A larm condition setting dialog box............................................................................................................. 9-10
Figure 9-9 A larm condition setting dialog box............................................................................................................. 9-11
Figure 9-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell........................................................................................................... 9-12
Figure 9-11 A larm Condition Setting dialog bo x ......................................................................................................... 9-13
Figure 9-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell ................................................................................................................ 9-14
Figure 9-13 Alarm of immed iate assignment success cell.......................................................................................... 9-15
Figure 9-14 Alarm of rad io connected cell.................................................................................................................... 9-16
Figure 9-15 Alarm of successful handover cell ............................................................................................................ 9-17
Figure 9-16 Starting an alarm task.................................................................................................................................. 9-18
Figure 9-17 Suspending an Alarm Task......................................................................................................................... 9-19
Figure 9-18 Activating an alarm task ............................................................................................................................. 9-20
Figure 9-19 Performance A larm navigation tree .......................................................................................................... 9-21

xv iii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 9-20 Alarm Operation dialog bo x ...................................................................................................................... 9-22


Figure 9-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task.............................................................................. 9-23
Figure 9-22 Creating an alarm task ................................................................................................................................ 9-24
Figure 9-23 Alarm Temp late navigation tree ................................................................................................................ 9-24
Figure 9-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog bo x ........................................................................................................ 9-25
Figure 9-25 Alarm Condition Sett ing dialog bo x......................................................................................................... 9-26
Figure 9-26 Deleting an alarm task ................................................................................................................................ 9-27
Figure 9-27 Confirmation dialog bo x about deleting an alarm task ......................................................................... 9-27
Figure 9-28 Modifying an alarm task............................................................................................................................. 9-28
Figure 9-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog bo x ........................................................................................................ 9-28
Figure 9-30 Alarm Condition Sett ing dialog bo x......................................................................................................... 9-29
Figure 9-31 History Alarm Search d ialog bo x.............................................................................................................. 9-30
Figure 9-32 Alarm window .............................................................................................................................................. 9-31
Figure 9-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu ...................................................................................................................... 9-32
Figure 9-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box......................................................................................................... 9-33
Figure 9-35 Notepad ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-34
Figure 10-1 Daily report co mmand ................................................................................................................................ 10-3
Figure 10-2 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box .................................................................................... 10-4
Figure 10-3 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box.................................................................................. 10-6
Figure 10-4 Cell Group dialog box................................................................................................................................. 10-7
Figure 10-5 New Cell Group dialog bo x ....................................................................................................................... 10-8
Figure 10-6 Daily report ................................................................................................................................................... 10-9
Figure 10-7 Weekly report command...........................................................................................................................10-10
Figure 10-8 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog bo x.................................................................................10-11
Figure 10-9 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box..........................................................................10-12
Figure 10-10 Weekly report ...........................................................................................................................................10-13
Figure 10-11 Monthly report command .......................................................................................................................10-14
Figure 10-12 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog bo x ....................................................................................10-15
Figure 10-13 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog bo x ...................................................................................10-16
Figure 10-14 Monthly report .........................................................................................................................................10-17
Figure 10-15 KPI sheet in the daily report ..................................................................................................................10-18
Figure 10-16 VIC sheet of Daily Report .....................................................................................................................10-20
Figure 10-17 KPI sheet of the weekly report ..............................................................................................................10-22

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 10-18 VIC sheet of weekly report ....................................................................................................................10-23


Figure 10-19 Network Monitoring Report co mmand ...............................................................................................10-28
Figure 10-20 Network Monitoring Report dialog bo x ..............................................................................................10-29
Figure 10-21 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page.....................................................................................10-30
Figure 10-22 Index ..........................................................................................................................................................10-31
Figure 10-23 Network Monitoring Report ..................................................................................................................10-33
Figure 10-24 Analysis Reports menu ...........................................................................................................................10-37
Figure 10-25 PCU Net work Monitoring Report dialog bo x ....................................................................................10-38
Figure 10-26 Eng ineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report ..........................................................10-40
Figure 10-27 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type ...................................................10-42
Figure 10-28 The PCU network monitoring report of Co mpare Report type .......................................................10-43
Figure 10-29 Swap Co mparison Report ......................................................................................................................10-45
Figure 10-30 Swap Co mpare .........................................................................................................................................10-46
Figure 10-31 Swap Co mparison Report ......................................................................................................................10-47
Figure 10-32 Report Output dialog box.......................................................................................................................10-49
Figure 10-33 Saving a template ....................................................................................................................................10-51
Figure 10-34 Report output............................................................................................................................................10-53
Figure 10-35 Generating an .xls report ........................................................................................................................10-54
Figure 11-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report d ialog bo x .................................................................................. 11-3
Figure 11-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there) .......................................................................... 11-4
Figure 11-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box......................... 11-5
Figure 11-4 Report Out Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box .................... 11-7
Figure 11-5 Auto Frequency Optimization Report ...................................................................................................... 11-8
Figure 11-6 Project Parameter Check dialog bo x ......................................................................................................11-10
Figure 11-7 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file ................................................................................................ 11-11
Figure 11-8 Configuration parameter co mparison report dialog box .....................................................................11-12
Figure 11-9 Configure parameter co mpare report......................................................................................................11-13
Figure 11-10 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box..............................................................................................................11-15
Figure 11-11 Trouble Shooting item list ......................................................................................................................11-17
Figure 11-12 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box .....................................................................................................11-18
Figure 11-13 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-19
Figure 11-14 Ob jects tab page .......................................................................................................................................11-20
Figure 11-15 Trouble Shooting tab page .....................................................................................................................11-21

xx

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 11-16 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog bo x ..................................................................................11-22
Figure 11-17 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog bo x .........................................11-23
Figure 11-18 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog bo x ........................11-24
Figure 11-19 User-defined Cell Filter dialog bo x ......................................................................................................11-25
Figure 11-20 Query Filter Condit ion dialog bo x........................................................................................................11-26
Figure 11-21 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-27
Figure 11-22 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box..............................................................................................................11-28
Figure 11-23 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-29
Figure 11-24 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog bo x...........................................................................................11-30
Figure 11-25 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-31
Figure 11-26 Queried Objects tab page .......................................................................................................................11-32
Figure 11-27 Ext ra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box......................................................................................................11-33
Figure 11-28 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-34
Figure 11-29 Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box ..........................................................................................11-36
Figure 11-30 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-37
Figure 11-31 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) d ialog bo x .........................................................................11-38
Figure 11-32 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-39
Figure 11-33 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) d ialog bo x ...............................................................................11-40
Figure 11-34 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-41
Figure 11-35 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32)......................................................................................11-42
Figure 11-36 Busy Time Modify d ialog bo x...............................................................................................................11-43
Figure 11-37 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu...........................................................................................11-45
Figure 11-38 Co -Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog bo x ......................................................................11-45
Figure 11-39 Channel check dialog bo x ......................................................................................................................11-46
Figure 11-40 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu...................................................................................11-46
Figure 11-41 Co -Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog bo x ......................................................................11-47
Figure 11-42 ARFCN Check dialog bo x .....................................................................................................................11-47
Figure 11-43 Check result of the adjacent channel ....................................................................................................11-48
Figure 11-44 Legend window........................................................................................................................................11-49
Figure 11-45 Co -BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu.........................................................................................................11-49
Figure 11-46 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box ...........................................................................................11-50
Figure 11-47 Co -channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog bo x................................................................................11-50
Figure 11-48 Idle ARFCNS menu ................................................................................................................................11-51

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxi

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 11-49 Idle ARFCN Check d ialog bo x .............................................................................................................11-51


Figure 11-50 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog bo x ...............................................................................................11-52
Figure 11-51 Spectru m Utilizat ion menu ....................................................................................................................11-53
Figure 11-52 Spectru m Utilizat ion dialog bo x ...........................................................................................................11-53
Figure 11-53 Result dialog bo x of ARFCN Ut ilization Check ................................................................................11-54
Figure 11-54 Co -HSN Co-MA Check menu ...............................................................................................................11-54
Figure 11-55 Co -HSN Co-MA Check d ialog bo x......................................................................................................11-55
Figure 11-56 Channel Check dialog box .....................................................................................................................11-56
Figure 11-57 ARFCN Display dialog box ...................................................................................................................11-57
Figure 11-58 Frequency Analysis menu ......................................................................................................................11-58
Figure 11-59 Hopping report object setting dialog box ............................................................................................11-58
Figure 11-60 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format ..................................................................................11-59
Figure 11-61 Browse For Folder ...................................................................................................................................11-60
Figure 11-62 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu................................................................................................11-61
Figure 11-63 Un idirect ional neighbor check result ...................................................................................................11-62
Figure 11-64 Neighbor Analysis menu ........................................................................................................................11-63
Figure 11-65 Neighbors relation effect ........................................................................................................................11-64
Figure 11-66 Add Bidirectional Neighbors .................................................................................................................11-65
Figure 11-67 Import Neighbor File menu ...................................................................................................................11-66
Figure 11-68 Neighbor Analysis menu ........................................................................................................................11-68
Figure 11-69 Please choose level adjacent relat ion file to import d ialog bo x.......................................................11-69
Figure 11-70 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import d ialog bo x .......................................................11-70
Figure 11-71 Export Neighbors menu..........................................................................................................................11-71
Figure 11-72 Export Neighbors dialog box.................................................................................................................11-71
Figure 11-73 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format ..........................................................................11-72
Figure 11-74 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format ...............................................................................11-72
Figure 11-75 Clear Config. Neighbors menu..............................................................................................................11-73
Figure 11-76 Confirmation bo x.....................................................................................................................................11-73
Figure 11-77 Clear Planned Neighbors menu .............................................................................................................11-74
Figure 11-78 Confirmation bo x.....................................................................................................................................11-74
Figure 11-79 Redundant Neighbor cell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box....................................................................11-75
Figure 11-80 Access Analysis........................................................................................................................................11-77
Figure 11-81 Error dialog bo x .......................................................................................................................................11-78

xxii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 11-82 Access Analysis Time Range tab page .................................................................................................11-78


Figure 11-83 Access analysis report .............................................................................................................................11-79
Figure 11-84 CHR Coverage Analysis.........................................................................................................................11-80
Figure 11-85 Cover Analysis Date Range tab page ...................................................................................................11-81
Figure 11-86 Cover Analysis report .............................................................................................................................11-82
Figure 11-87 Call Drop Analysis ..................................................................................................................................11-84
Figure 11-88 Call drop report ........................................................................................................................................11-85
Figure 11-89 CHR Voice Analysis................................................................................................................................11-87
Figure 11-90 The NetProperty CHR Vo ice Analysis .................................................................................................11-88
Figure 11-91 MS Group setting.....................................................................................................................................11-89
Figure 11-92 MS Ed it......................................................................................................................................................11-90
Figure 11-93 Measurement Report Analysis command ............................................................................................11-92
Figure 11-94 Measurement Report Analysis dialog bo x...........................................................................................11-93
Figure 11-95 CarrierAnaly Report .................................................................................................................................11-95
Figure 11-96 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) d ialog bo x ...............................11-97
Figure 11-97 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog bo x ...............................................................................................11-99
Figure 11-98 Analysis Setting menu ..........................................................................................................................11-100
Figure 11-99 Setting dialog box ..................................................................................................................................11-100
Figure 11-100 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog bo x ........................................11-101
Figure 11-101 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog bo x .................................11-102
Figure 11-102 Trouble Shooting menu ......................................................................................................................11-103
Figure 11-103 UL Interference Analysis dialog bo x ...............................................................................................11-104
Figure 11-104 Queried Ob jects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box ......................................11-105
Figure 11-105 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box..........................................................................11-106
Figure 11-106 There is no data....................................................................................................................................11-106
Figure 11-107 Time and Ob ject Setting tab page .....................................................................................................11-107
Figure 11-108 Defau lt Setting tab page .....................................................................................................................11-108
Figure 11-109 Analysis results ....................................................................................................................................11-109
Figure 11-110 Carrier Fault jerque Analysis dialog bo x ......................................................................................... 11-111
Figure 11-111 Quality-Balance-TA tab page.............................................................................................................11-112
Figure 11-112 Assignment-Link tab page..................................................................................................................11-113
Figure 12-1 Net work Expansion Report co mmand ..................................................................................................... 12-3
Figure 12-2 Net work Expansion Report dialog bo x.................................................................................................... 12-4

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxiii

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figures

Figure 12-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box ............................................... 12-5
Figure 12-4 Net work Expansion Report ........................................................................................................................ 12-6
Figure 12-5 Net work Expansion Report in OW C mode ............................................................................................. 12-7
Figure 12-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command .............................................................................................. 12-8
Figure 12-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box .......................................................................................................... 12-9
Figure 12-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box ..........................................12-10
Figure 12-9 LAC Capacity report .................................................................................................................................12-12
Figure 12-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog bo x..........................................................................................12-14
Figure 12-11 Ext ra Busy Cell Analysis dialog bo x....................................................................................................12-15
Figure 12-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog bo x......................................................................................................12-16
Figure 12-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box ...............................................................................................12-18
Figure 13-1 License Error dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................ 13-3
Figure 13-2 Open dialog bo x........................................................................................................................................... 13-4
Figure 13-3 License information..................................................................................................................................... 13-5
Figure 13-4 Input performance data error ..................................................................................................................... 13-8
Figure 13-5 Net work info rmation dialog bo x............................................................................................................... 13-8
Figure 13-6 Problem h int dialog bo x ............................................................................................................................. 13-9
Figure 13-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check ................................................................................................13-12
Figure 13-8 A mplified map o f co-channel and adjacent channel check ................................................................13-13
Figure 13-9 Site View .....................................................................................................................................................13-14
Figure 13-10 Show Items Option dialog bo x..............................................................................................................13-19
Figure 13-11 Case of a too large displaying area .......................................................................................................13-20
Figure 13-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected.................................................................................13-21
Figure 13-13 Export Neighbors command ..................................................................................................................13-22
Figure 13-14 Export Neighbors dialog bo x ................................................................................................................13-23
Figure 13-15 Neighbor Analysis menu ........................................................................................................................13-23
Figure 13-16 Please choose level adjacent relat ion file to import dialog bo x ......................................................13-24
Figure 13-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to impo rt dialog box ..................................................13-25
Figure 13-18 Output dialog box ....................................................................................................................................13-26
Figure 13-19 Open dialog box.......................................................................................................................................13-27
Figure 13-20 Select Tab le dialog box...........................................................................................................................13-27
Figure 13-21 Import Setup dialog box .........................................................................................................................13-28

xxiv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Data co llect ion methods for different types of NEs ..................................................................................... 1-3
Table 1-2 Net working mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data fro m the M2000) ............................................... 1-6
Table 1-3 Net working mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data fro m the BAM) .................................................. 1-8
Table 1-4 Soft ware configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM ......................................................................... 1-9
Table 1-5 Soft ware configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM ....................................................................... 1-11
Table 1-6 Supported NE versions ................................................................................................................................... 1-12
Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version ........................................................................ 2-3
Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition ....................................................................................................... 2-4
Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server......................................................................................................... 2-9
Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog bo x ................................................................................................ 2-19
Table 2-5 Structure of the directory ................................................................................................................................ 2-41
Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI .............................................................................................................. 3-3
Table 3-2 Description of the View menu ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu ........................................................................................................................ 3-10
Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar ...................................................................................... 3-10
Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimizat ion toolbar...................................................................................... 3-11
Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar............................................................................................................. 3-12
Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar ....................................................................................................... 3-13
Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata ...................................................................................................... 3-22
Table 3-9 Description of the View menu ....................................................................................................................... 3-24
Table 3-10 Description of the Tool menu ...................................................................................................................... 3-24
Table 3-11 Description of the Help menu ...................................................................................................................... 3-26
Table 3-12 Icons on the toolbar ....................................................................................................................................... 3-26
Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box ............................................................................................................... 4-4
Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Informat ion dialog bo x ........................................................................................ 4-7
Table 5-1 Data sources ........................................................................................................................................................ 5-8

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxv

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Tables

Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM .................................................................................................... 5-9
Table 5-3 Import ing configuration parameter mode .................................................................................................... 5-11
Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement............................................................................................. 5-12
Table 5-5 Description of the result of co mparing project parameters ....................................................................... 5-30
Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check d ialog bo x ............. 5-43
Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page ......................................................................... 5-44
Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report ......................................................................... 5-47
Table 5-9 Opt ions on the shortcut menu ........................................................................................................................ 5-51
Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar............................................................................................................ 5-62
Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar ....................................................................................................................................... 5-97
Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart ............................................................................................... 5-99
Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box....................................................................................................... 6-14
Table 7-1 Info rmation about the database versions of the BSC and Nastar .............................................................. 7-2
Table 7-2 Neighbor Cell Optimization Parameter.......................................................................................................... 7-6
Table 7-3 Description of each configuration item entered for auto matic neighboring cell optimizat ion ........... 7-13
Table 8-1 Versions of the BSC and the M2000............................................................................................................... 8-2
Table 8-2 Parameter description of each configurat ion item........................................................................................ 8-7
Table 9-1 Alarm condition setting symbol....................................................................................................................... 9-6
Table 9-2 Checking alarm messages............................................................................................................................... 9-21
Table 9-3 Description of fields ........................................................................................................................................ 9-35
Table 10-1 Description of the Setting tab page............................................................................................................. 10-4
Table 10-2 Element on the Setting tab page................................................................................................................10-15
Table 10-3 TopN...............................................................................................................................................................10-31
Table 10-4 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report .................................................................................................10-34
Table 10-5 Sheets in the team leader mon itoring report ...........................................................................................10-35
Table 10-6 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report ...........................................................................................10-36
Table 10-7 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog bo x.......................................................................10-39
Table 10-8 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report............................................................................................10-40
Table 10-9 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report ......................................................................................10-42
Table 10-10 Function of each sheet in Co mpare Report ...........................................................................................10-44
Table 10-11 Sheets in the swap comparison report ....................................................................................................10-48
Table 10-12 Output setting of the report ......................................................................................................................10-50
Table 11-1 Description of configuration analysis ......................................................................................................... 11-2

xxv i

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Tables

Table 11-2 Frequency band and range............................................................................................................................ 11-6


Table 11-3 Description of the Configuration parameter co mparison report dialog bo x ......................................11-13
Table 11-4 The range of frequency point and their corresponding frequency band .............................................11-44
Table 11-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog bo x ......................................................................................11-57
Table 11-6 TA field abscissa display.............................................................................................................................11-83
Table 11-7 Analysis Result analysis sheet ...................................................................................................................11-85
Table 11-8 Analysis result call drop reason tree .........................................................................................................11-86
Table 11-9 Net work Element Ob ject ............................................................................................................................11-89
Table 11-10 Description of Time and Ob ject Setting tab page ................................................................................11-94
Table 11-11 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.................................................................11-99
Table 11-12 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box ...........11-102
Table 11-13 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box .......................11-104
Table 12-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog bo x ............... 12-4
Table 12-2 Description of the LA C Capacity Analysis dialog bo x ........................................................................... 12-9
Table 12-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
.............................................................................................................................................................................................12-11
Table 13-1 Process procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 13-6
Table 13-2 Calculat ion formu la of non-original (BSC 32) .......................................................................................13-17
Table 13-3 Handover success rate.................................................................................................................................13-29
Table 14-1 Abbreviations.................................................................................................................................................. 14-1

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xxv ii

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Overview

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Section

Describes

1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM

The software architecture, networking mode,


software configuration, workflow, and NE versions
of the Nastar GSM.

1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM

The applications of the Nastar GSM.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

1.1 Introduction to the Nastar GSM


1.1.1 Overview
Developed independently by Huawei, the GENEX Nastar GSM is an integrated network
optimization tool that can be applied to the GSM BSS 9000/1800 system. Based on the
OMC-R performance data, configuration data, and project parameters, the Nastar GSM
analyzes the GSM BSS network and exports analysis results in the following formats:

Chart

Report

Map

The Nastar GSM provides the following functions:

Monitoring the network status


Analyzing the network quality

Locating problematic areas

In this way, the Nastar GSM helps to improve the efficiency of network optimization
engineers and satisfy customer's further demands on quality of service (QoS).
The Nastar GSM consists of two versions:

Server/ client mode

For details, see section 1.1.4 "Server/Client Mode."


Stand-alone mode
For details, see section 1.1.5 "Stand-Alone Mode."

The physical architecture and the software configuration for the server / client mode and the
stand-alone mode are different.

1.1.2 Software Structure


The Nastar GSM comprises the following modules:

Data collection module


Import data module

Client

Data Collection Module


The data collection module provides the following functions:

Supporting manual and automatic collection of the following data:

1-2

Configuration data of the BSC32, BSC6000, and packet control unit (PCU)
Performance data

Call history record (CHR) data

Filtering and compressing all types of data

Uploading the data to the performance Nastar server (PNS)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

You can use different methods to collect data from different NEs.
Table 1-1 describes the data collection methods and the location from which the data is
obtained.
Table 1-1 Data collection methods for different types of NEs
NE

Data Collection
Tool

Installation
Location

Data
Obtaining
Location

Function

BSC6000

Data collection tool

PNS

M2000

Obtaining the configuration


data and performance data of
the BSC6000 from the
specified directory of the
M2000

BSC32

Dynamic
performance data
convert tool
(NAConvert)

BAM

BAM

Extracting the latest


performance data from the
back administration module
(BAM) at regular intervals

Uploading the converted


data to the performance
server through the file
transfer protocol (FTP)

Extracting partial
performance data from the
original performance files
of the BSC32

Generating specified result


files

Time-segment-based
performance data
extract tool
(StatTrans)

BAM

BAM

The size of the BSC32


performance files is
decreased after being
segmented.
PCU

Data collection tool

PNS

BAM

Obtaining the configuration


and performance data of the
PCU from the appointed
directory of the PCU

Data Import Module


The Transdata is a data import module in the Nastar GSM. The Transdata imports the
following data to the SQL Server:

04 (2008-12-10)

Performance data
Base station controller (BSC) configuration data

Packet control unit (PCU) configuration data

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

The Transdata also provides the following functions:

Viewing the result of performance registration

Displaying the information about the current database


Backing up current task information

Client
The client supports the analysis of performance data and consists of the following modules:

Platform module

Performance monitoring module

Intelligent report module

Basic analysis module

Senior analys is module

Operation decision module

1.1.3 Networking Mode


The Nastar GSM system comprises data collection servers, PNSs, and Nastar clients. The
entities use the TCP/IP protocol to be connected through a local area network (LAN). Based
on the FTP protocol, the following modules transmit files between each other:

Nastar collection server and M2000

Nastar collection server and PNS

The Nastar GSM can collect data from the M2000 or the BAM server. Therefore, the
networking mode is categorized into two types.

Collecting Data from the M2000


If the Huawei BSC6000 and Huawei M2000 are used on a network, the data collection server
collects the network optimization data from the M2000 server. REF _Ref175976550 \r \h
Figure 1-1 shows the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000).

1-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Figure 1-1 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000)

Client
Collection server

Client
PNS

LAN
Client

M2000
Intranet

BSC

04 (2008-12-10)

BAM

BSC

BAM

BSC

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

BAM

1-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

REF _Ref175976572 \r \h Table 1-2 describes the networking mode of the Nastar GSM
(collecting data from the M2000).
Table 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the M2000)
Scenario Description

On commercial GSM networks, the M2000 manages all the NEs in the
BSC6000. The network optimization data is stored in the M2000.

Number of Data
Collection Servers

On the BSS network where the M2000 manages all the NEs, the number of
collection servers is the same as the number of the M2000 servers.

If the M2000 is configured in part of the BSS network, the number of


collection servers is the sum of the number of the M2000 servers and the
equipment rooms where the BAM is located.

Placing the Collection


Server

Huawei recommends that you place the collection server and PNS in the same
equipment room. In this way, you can configure, manage, and upgrade the
collection server conveniently.

Security Plan of the PNS

Interconnection Mode

Storing the Network


Optimization Data

If the PNS and the M2000 are located on different network segments, the
collection server should be configured with double network cards. If the
PNS and the M2000 are located on the same network segment, a network
card is configured to the collection server.

The collection server downloads data from the M2000.

The collection server uploads data to the PNS.

The FTP service should be installed and started in the M2000 and PNS.

For the original network optimization data stored in the M2000, you can set
the storage period to 5-10 days.
If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are not integrated in one
physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on network
optimization in one BSC to 3-6 months.

Advantage, Disadvantage,
and Limitation

1-6

The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access
list of the M2000 firewall. Thus, the collection server can collect the
optimization data from the M2000.
The stationary IP address of the collection server can be added to the access
list of the firewall in the PNS. Thus, the collection server can upload the
collected optimization data to the PNS.

If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are integrated in one
physical entity, you can set the storage period of the original data on network
optimization in one BSC to 1-3 months.

The PNS does not store the original network optimization data.

The planning of the networking mode is clear and distinct. The Nastar
collection server and analysis server are placed together. In this way, you can
manage them conveniently. You can obtain the performance data of the BTS
through the M2000.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Collecting Data from the BAM


If the Huawei BSC30 or Huawei PCU is used on a network, the data collection server collects
the network optimization data from the BAM server. Figure 1-2 shows the networking mode
of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM).
Figure 1-2 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)

Area A
BSC

BAM
Collection
Collect Server
server

BSC

BAM

Intranet

BSC

04 (2008-12-10)

BAM

Collection
Collect
Server
server

PNS

LAN

Area B

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Table 1-3 describes the networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM).
Table 1-3 Networking mode of the Nastar GSM (collecting data from the BAM)
Scenario Description

If the Huawei BSC32 or Huawei PCU is used on a network, the


network optimization data is stored in each BAM.

Number of
Configured
Collection Servers

One collection server is required for the equipment room where


the BAM is placed. If multiple BAMs are placed in one
equipment room, only one collection server is required for the
equipment room.

Placing the
Collection Server

The collection server and BAM should be placed in the same


equipment room. If they are not placed in the same equipment
room, the rooms where they are placed should be located on the
same network segment.

Security Plan of the


Servers

The stationary IP address of the collection server can be


added to the access list of the BAM firewall. Thus, the
collection server can collect the optimization data from the
BAM.

The stationary IP address of the collection server can be


added to the access list of the firewall in the PNS. Thus, the
collection server can upload the collected optimization data to
the PNS.

If the PNS and the BAM are located on different network


segments, the collection server should be configured with
double network cards. If the PNS and the BAM are located on
the same network segment, a network card is configured to
the collection server.

The collection server downloads data from the BAM.

The collection server uploads data to the PNS.


The FTP service should be installed and started in the BAM
and PNS.

Interconnection
Mode

Storing the Network


Optimization Data

If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are not
integrated in one physical entity, you can set the storage
period of the original data on network optimization in one
BSC to three months.

If the Nastar data collection server and the PNS are integrated
in one physical entity, you can set the storage period of the
original data on network optimization in one BSC to one
month.
The PNS does not store the original network optimization
data.

1-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

1.1.4 Server/Client Mode


The Nastar GSM server/client mode performs different tasks by using the server and client.

The server imports data and performs public functions, such as the client and
management of multiple users.

The client analyzes the performance data and generates analysis reports.

The Nastar GSM server and client use different computers or the same computer. When they
use different computers, the two computers are connected through the TCP/IP protocol in
LAN mode or virtual private network (VPN) mode. The server/client mode in the Nastar
GSM comprises the following physical entities:

Data collection server

Performance local server (PLS) (optional)

PNS
Nastar client

Software Configuration
Table 1-4 lists the functions of the software installed on each entity in server/client mode.
Table 1-4 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM
Entity

Software Configuration

Function

PLS
(optional)

SQL Server

Storing original CHR data

GENEX Nastar PLS

Collecting and preprocessing the CHR data

FTP server

Uploading the pre-processed CHR data to


the PNS

Data
collection
server

The Nastar data collection


tool

Collecting, compressing, and filtering


the network optimization data

Uploading the data to the FTP server

PNS

FTP server

Acquiring the following data:

Nastar GSM Transdata

Importing data from the FTP server to the


SQL Server

SQL Server

Storing the network optimization data for


the PNS

Allowing the Nastar clients to access the


data

Analyzing the network performance

Generating the analysis reports

Nastar client

04 (2008-12-10)

Network optimization data uploaded by


the Nastar data collection server and PLS
Engineering data uploaded through other
means

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Entity

Software Configuration

Function

Nastar client

Nastar client

Analyzing the network performance

Generating the analysis reports

Workflow
Figure 1-3 shows the workflow of the Nastar GSM in server/client mode.
Figure 1-3 Workflow of the Nastar GSM
Data
storage

Data
collection
M2000/
BAM
Data
collection
server
Nastar
server
Nastar
client

Data
analysis

Original
data
Data
1
collection
tool
FTP
server

3
2

Transdata

SQL
Server

Nastar
A

Access

Nastar
B

Access

Nastar
C

Access

The workflow of the Nastar GSM is as follows:

Collecting data
You can collect the network optimization data by using the data collection tool, or the
data collection tool automatically collects the network optimization data. Huawei
recommends automatic collection. The PLS collects and preprocesses the CHR data and
imports the data to the PNS.

1-10

Storing data
The data collection tool automatically uploads data to the PNS through the FTP. The
Nastar WCDMA Transdata is a data import tool in the PNS. You can start the Transdata
and it automatically imports periodic data to the SQL Server on the PNS.

Analyzing data
The Nastar client analyzes data. The data is displayed on the PNS or Nastar client.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

1.1.5 Stand-Alone Mode


The Nastar GSM can perform the following operations in one workstation in stand-alone
mode:

Import data

Analyze monitoring reports

Generate reports

The Nastar GSM comprises the following physical entities in stand-alone mode:

Data collection server


PLS (optional)

Nastar stand-alone server (Mini-server)

Comparing with the server/client mode, the stand-alone mode integrates the PNS and Nastar
client. The Nastar server, however, is capable of analyzing the data of only one BSC.

Software Configuration
Table 1-5 lists the functions of the software installed on each entity in stand-alone mode.
Table 1-5 Software configuration of each entity of the Nastar GSM
Entity

Software Configuration

Function

PLS
(optional)

SQL Server

Storing original CHR data

GENEX Nastar PLS

Collecting and pre-processing the CHR data

FTP server

Uploading the pre-processed CHR data to


the PNS

The Nastar data collection


tool or NAConvert

Collecting, compressing, and filtering the


network optimization data

Uploading the data to the FTP server

Data
collection
server

NOTE
For the versions earlier than the
G3BSC32V300R008C01, the NAConvert is used
to collect data

Nastar
stand-alone
server

04 (2008-12-10)

FTP server

Acquiring the following data:

Network optimization data uploaded by


the Nastar data collecting server and PLS

Engineering data uploaded through other


means

Nastar GSM Transdata

Importing data from the FTP server to the


SQL Server

Microsoft SQL Server


desktop engine (MSDE)

Storing the data imported from the FTP


server

Permitting data access for the Nastar


client

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Entity

Software Configuration

Function

Nastar client

Analyzing the network performance

Generating the analysis reports

Workflow
The Nastar GSM workflow in stand-alone mode is similar to the workflow in server/client
mode. For details about the workflow, refer to Figure 1-3. In stand-alone mode, the Nastar
GSM is not configured with a Nastar client. The Nastar GSM stand-alone server functions as
the PNS plus the Nastar client.
The server/client mode and stand-alone mode use the same Nastar GSM installation packet. You can
choose to install the version you need during installing the Nastar GSM . You can differentiate the server
version from the stand-alone version through the dongle authority.

1.1.6 NE Version
Table 1-6 lists the network element (NE) versions supported by the Nastar GSM V200R005.
Table 1-6 Supported NE versions
Supported Object

Product Version

BSC32

G3BSC32V300R002C10
G3BSC32V300R002C11
G3BSC32V300R002C12
G3BSC32V300R002C13
G3BSC32V300R006C01
G3BSC32V300R006C02
G3BSC32V300R007C01
G3BSC32V300R007C02
G3BSC32V300R008C01
G3BSC32V300R008C11

BSC6000

BSC6000V900R001C01B066
BSC6000V900R001C02B084
BSC6000V900R001C03B104
BSC6000V900R001C04B032
BSC6000V900R001C04B061
BSC6000V900R003C01B032

1-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

1 Overview

Supported Object

Product Version
BSC6000V900R003C01B061
BSC6000V900R003C01B070
BSC6000V900R008C01B046
BSC6000V900R008C01B048
BSC6000V900R008C01B051
BSC6000V900R008C11B168
BSC6000V900R008C12B195

PCU

G3PCUV300R005C05
G3PCUV300R008C01
G3PCUV300R008C02
G3PCUV300R008C03
G3PCUV300R008C11

1.2 Applications of the Nastar GSM


1.2.1 Application Scenarios
The Nastar GSM is intended for network O&M engineers and network optimization engineers
from operators. The Nastar GSM is applied to the following scenarios:

Routine network monitoring

The Nastar can periodically generate periodical reports on network monitoring. You can
monitor the performance of networks by analyzing the reports.
Analyzing and problem locating
To locate problems or analyze network performance or trend, you can connect the
desktop or portable PCs that are installed with the Nastar GSM client to the PNS.

1.2.2 Application Modes


The application modes of the Nastar GSM are as follows:

Local
In this mode, you need not install the SQL Server. You can use the provided network
planning or optimization-related functions. The performance-related functions, however,
cannot be used.

Online
In this mode, you need to install the SQL Server. You can use all the provided
performance-related analys is functions. All traffic statistic data and analysis data is saved
on the local computer.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Installation of the Nastar GSM

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Section

Describes

2.1 Introduction to the


Installation

The installation requirements for users and the procedures


for installing the GENEX Nastar GSM.

2.2 Preparing the PNS

The preparations for the installation of the Nastar GSM.

2.3 Installing the Related


Software

The installation and the configuration of the Nastar GSM


and related software.

2.4 Introduction to the


Installation Directory

The structure of the installation directory of the Nastar


GSM.

2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar


GSM

The procedures for uninstalling the Nastar GSM.

2.6 License Management

The introduction of license management.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

2.1 Introduction to the Installation


2.1.1 Requirements for User
The installation personnel must familiarize themselves with the basic operations of a personal
computer (PC), such as the operations on the Windows 2000 or Windows XP, and Office
2007.

2.1.2 Flow Chart


Figure 2-1 shows the flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM.
Figure 2-1 Flow chart of installing the Nastar GSM
Installing
SQL Server/MSDE

Installing GENEX
Shared component

Installing Nastar
GSM

Installing
successfully

NOTE

The SQL Server is installed on the PNS, and the M icrosoft SQL-Serve desktop engine (M SDE) is
installed on the stand-alone server of the Nastar GSM .

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

2.2 Preparing the PNS


2.2.1 Checking the Hardware of the Server
Configuration of the Server/Client Mode
The configuration of the Nastar GSM system is based on the number of cells. In server/client
mode, when the number of cells is fewer than 2,000, or when the number of carriers is fewer
than 5,000, the recommended configuration of the Nastar GSM is listed in Table 2-1. Every
2,000 cells or 5,000 carriers require a PNS.
Table 2-1 Nastar GSM system configuration in server/client version
Configuration
Object

Configuration
Item

Configuration

Data collection server

Hardware
configuration

PLS

Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP


Professional / Windows 2003

Hardware
configuration

04 (2008-12-10)

Memory: 1 GB
Hard disk: 2 x 146 GB redundant array of
inexpens ive disks (RAID1)

Operating
system

PNS

PC server
CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.2 GHz or faster

PC server
CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.6 GHz or faster
Memory: 4 GB (4 x 1 GB)
Hard disk: 3 x 146 GB (SCSI, RAID 0)

Operating
system

Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition or


Enterprise Edition

Database

Microsoft SQL Server 2005 Standard Edition


or Enterprise Edition

FTP server

Server-U2.0/ISS 5.0 Edition or later

Hardware
configuration

PC server

CPU: 2 x Xeon 3.6 GHz or faster


Memory: 4 GB (4 x 1 GB)

Hard disk: 4 x 146 GB (SCSI, RAID 0)

Operating
system

Windows 2000 Professional

Windows 2003

Database

Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Enterprise Edition

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Configuration
Object

Configuration
Item

Configuration

Nastar client

Hardware
configuration

PC

CPU: 2.4 GHz

Memory: 512 MB
Hard disk: 40 GB

Monitor VGA: 1024 x 768, 16-bit color or


higher

Port: one parallel port or USB port to connect


the dongle

Operating
system

Windows 2000 Professional / Windows XP


Professional

Office software

Microsoft Office 2003

CAUTION
The number of users connected to the operating system of the PNS must be the same as the
number of users connected to the database. When the SQL Server is Enterprise Edition, the
operating system must be the Enterprise Edition.

Configuration of the Stand-Alone Edition


Table 2-2 describes the configuration of the Nastar GSM system with stand-alone.
Table 2-2 Configuration of the stand-alone edition
Configuration Configuration Configuration Requirement
Type
Item
Recommended
configuration

Hardware
configuration

Operating
system

2-4

CPU: Pentium IV 2 GHz or faster

Memory: 512 MB

Hard disk: 40 GB

Monitor: VGA, 1024 x 768, 16-bit colors or above

Port: at least one parallel port or USB port to


connect the dongle

Windows NT4.0 or higher

Windows 2000 Professional

Windows XP Professional

Windows 2003

Database

MSDE, SQL Server 2005 Express Edition

Office software

Microsoft Office 2003

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Configuration Configuration Configuration Requirement


Type
Item
Minimum
configuration

Hardware
configuration

CPU: Pentium III 800 MHz

Memory: 256 MB

Hard disk: 10 GB spare disk space


Display: VGA; 1024x768, 16-bit colors or higher

Operating
system

Port: at least one parallel port or USB port to


connect the dongle

Windows NT4.0 or higher

Windows 2000 Professional

Windows XP Professional

Windows 2003

Database

MSDE, SQL Server 2005 Express Edition

Office Software

Microsoft Office 2003

2.2.2 Checking the System Environment


Checking the System Configuration
The Excel component of Microsoft Office must be installed on the PNS or client. Before
installing the Nastar GSM, check whether the Microsoft Office, especially the Microsoft
Excel, is installed on the client. If the Microsoft Office is not installed on the client, install the
Microsoft Office before you install the Nastar GSM.

Checking Network Environment


Before installing the Nastar GSM, you need to check the network environment and set the IP
address of the client based on the network segments provided by the operator.

If the network segment and IP address are not available, contact the O&M personnel of the
operator. Ensure that the IP address to be specified is unique on the network segments.
Otherwise, an IP conflict occurs.
To check network environment, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose start > Settings > Control Panel.
Step 2 Double-click Network Connections.
Step 3 Double-click Local Area Connection.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

The Local Area Connection Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Local Area Connection Status dialog box

2-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 4 Click Properties.


The Local Area Connection Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.
Figure 2-3 Local Area Connection Properties dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 5 On the General tab page, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-4 Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog box

Step 6 Enter an IP address.


The input IP address and the IP addresses of the BSC and the BAM must belong to the same
network segment.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End

2-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

2.3 Installing the Related Software


2.3.1 Installing the SQL Server
Installing Description
You can choose to install the SQL Server or install only the MSDE. The MSDE is
recommended for the stand-alone version. If multiple users share the network at the same time,
the SQL Server is recommended.
This document takes the installation of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition as an
example. This section introduces the installation of the SQL Server. For details, refer to the
online help of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000.

Preparations
Before installing the SQL Server 2000, you need to perform the following operations :

Select an installation edition


At present, the database of the PNS is SQL Server 2000 and Microsoft SQL Server 2000
Service Pack 4. The installation edition depends on the operating system.
Table 2-3 lists the operating systems and corresponding SQL Server editions.

Table 2-3 Selecting the edition of the SQL Server


Operating System

SQL Server Edition

Windows XP

SQL Server 2000 Personal Edition

Windows 2000

SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition

04 (2008-12-10)

Log in to the system as the user who has administrative rights to the system
Ensure that all services related to the SQL Server and open database connectivity
(ODBC) are closed.
Ensure that the event examiner and register table examiner, that is, regedit.exe or
regedt32.exe, are closed.
Ensure sure that the Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or a later version is installed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Procedures
To install the SQL Server, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Insert the installation CD of the Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Standard Edition.
If the installation packet is autorun, the initial installation interface is displayed, as shown in
Figure 2-5. If the installation packet is not autorun, run the installation file.
Figure 2-5 Initial installation interface

2-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 2 Click SQL Server 2000 Components.


The Installation type selection window is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Installation type selection screen

Step 3 Click Install Database Server.


The Setup progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-7 Setup progress bar

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

After the InstallShield Wizard is prepared, the Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-8 Welcome dialog box

2-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 4 Click Next.


The Computer Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Computer Name dialog box

Step 5 Based on actual requirements, perform the following settings in the Computer Name dialog
box:

Local Computer
Local Computer is selected by default. The name of the local computer is shown in the
text box. Select Local Computer if you plan to install the SQL Server on a local
computer.

Remote Computer
Select Remote Computer for remote installation. Type a computer name, or click
Browse to select a remote computer.

04 (2008-12-10)

Virtual Server
The Virtual Server is selected when a cluster is detected.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 6 Click Next.


The Installation Selection dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-10.
Figure 2-10 Installation Selection dialog box

2-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 7 In the Installation Selection dialog box, select Create a new instance of the SQL Server,
or install Client Tools, and then click Next.
The User Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-11.
Figure 2-11 User Information dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 8 Type the name and company name, and then click Next.
The Software License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Software License Agreement dialog box

2-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 9 Click Yes.


The CD-Key dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-13.
Figure 2-13 CD-Key dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 10 Enter the correct CD key, and then click Next.


The Installation Definition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-14.
Figure 2-14 Installation Definition dialog box

2-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 11 Select Server and Client Tools, and then click Next.
The Instance Name dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-15.
Figure 2-15 Instance Name dialog box

Step 12 In the Instance Name dialog box, set the item based on Table 2-4.
Table 2-4 Operation in the Instance Name dialog box
If

You can infer that

Operation

You select
Default

you can install the


default instance or name
an instance.

the default instance


already exists, and you
can name only the
instance.

Enter a new instance name in the


Instance name field, and then click Next.

You do not select


Default

04 (2008-12-10)

To install the default instance, select


Default, and then click Next.
To name an instance, clear the Default
checkbox. Type a new name in
Instance name, and then click Next.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-16.


Figure 2-16 Setup Type dialog box

Step 13 Perform the following operations in the Setup Type dialog box:

2-20

1.

Select Typical, Minimum or Custom.

2.

In the Destination Folder area, click Browse, and then set the target path of Program
Files and Data Files to C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3.

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Click Next.
The Select Components dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Select Components dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 14 Click Next.


To ensure normal operation of the system, the default configuration is recommended.
Figure 2-18 shows the Services Accounts dialog box.
Figure 2-18 Services Accounts dialog box

Step 15 Set the SQL Server services accounts in the Service Accounts dialog box.

If you select Use the same account for each service. Auto start SQL Server Service ,
you can log in to the server and client as the same user account.

If you select Customize the setting for each service, you need to set different login
account for the server and client.

You can select Use the Local System account or Use a Domain User account in the Service
Setting area, which is used to bind the SQL Server. Selecting Use the Local System account
is recommended.

2-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 16 Click Next.


The Authentication Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-19.
Figure 2-19 Authentication Mode

Step 17 You can select Windows Authentication Mode or Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication
and SQL Server Authentication) in the Authentication Mode dialog box.

If you select Windows Authentication Mode, the user name and password of Windows
is required when the client logs in to the server. You can set the users and passwords in
Control Panel of Windows.

If you select Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server


Authentication), you can use the user name and password of the Windows, and the user
name and password set for SQL Server, for example, administrator sa.

The Mixed Mode (Windows Authentication and SQL Server Authentication) is


recommended.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 18 Click Next.


The Collation Settings dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-20.
Figure 2-20 Collation Settings dialog box

Step 19 Select Collation designator, and then select Chinese_PRC from the drop-down list. Under
Sort order, use the default value.

2-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 20 Click Next.


The Network Libraries dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-21.
Figure 2-21 Network Libraries dialog box

Step 21 Select Name Pipes and TCP/IP Sockets. Set Name Pipes to \\.\pipe\sql\query and set Port
number in TCP/IP Sockets to 1433.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 22 Click Next.


The Start Copying Files dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-22.
Figure 2-22 Start Copying Files dialog box

2-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 23 Ensure that all information is set correctly, and then click Next.
The Choose Licensing Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Choose Licensing Mode dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 24 In the Choose Licensing Mode dialog box, click Per Seat for, and then enter the
corresponding number of devices. Click Continue.
After the setup is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
2-24.
Figure 2-24 Setup Complete dialog box

Step 25 Click Finish, and then restart the computer.


----End
NOTE

The installation program of the SQL Server is case insensitive.

2-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

2.3.2 Installing the MSDE


To install the MSDE, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click setup.exe.
The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25 Welcome dialog box

Step 2 Click Next.


The system starts to install the MSDE, as shown in Figure 2-26.
Figure 2-26 Installation progress bar

Step 3 After the installation is complete, click Finish.


----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-29

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM


NOTE

The setup.ini configuration file in the installation directory of the M SDE has an option, that is,
INS TANCENAME. The option refers to the name of an instance and the default value is GENEX.
When reinstalling the M SDE, you can choose not to uninstall the existing M SDE instance. In this case,
you must specify a different instance name, that is, you need to add an SQL application instance. If you
plan to use the existing M SDE instance name, you need to uninstall the service program related to the
instance name.
The M SDE does not delete the instance file in the path of the M icrosoft SQL Server. For example, the
MSSQL$GEN EX folder in the path C:\Program Files\M icrosoft SQL Server is not deleted. You need to
delete the instance file before you reinstall the Nastar. Thus, uninstalling the M SDE is not
recommended.

2.3.3 Installing the GENEX Shared Components


To install the GENEX Shared components, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the GENEX Shared. Double-click setup.exe.
The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-27.
Figure 2-27 Welcome dialog box

2-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 2 Click Next.


The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-28.
Figure 2-28 License Agreement dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-31

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 3 Click Yes.


The Setup Status progress dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-29.
Figure 2-29 Setup Status progress dialog box

2-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

After the installation is complete, the InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-30.
Figure 2-30 InstallShield Wizard Complete dialog box

Step 4 Click Finish, and then restart the computer.


----End

2.3.4 Installing the Nastar GSM


To install the Nastar GSM, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click setup.exe in the Nastar GSM installation packet.
The Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-31.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-33

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Figure 2-31 Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Nastar GSM dialog box

2-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 2 Click Next.


The License Agreement dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-32.
Figure 2-32 License Agreement dialog box

Step 3 Select I accept the terms of the license agreement, and then click Next.
The Customer Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-33.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-35

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Figure 2-33 Customer Information dialog box

Step 4 Type the user information in the User Name and Company Name fields.
Step 5 Select the associated options according to your requirements.

If you allow anyone to use this software, select Anyone who uses this computer (all
users).

If only you can use this software, select Only for me.

Step 6 Click Next.


The Setup Type dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-34.

2-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Figure 2-34 Setup Type dialog box

Step 7 Choose the setup type in the Setup Type dialog box:

Stand-alone Edition

If Stand-alone Edition is selected, the MSDE is required.


Server Edition
If Server Edition is selected, the MSDE is optional.

Step 8 Click Next.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-37

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

The Choose Destination Location dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-35.
Figure 2-35 Choose Destination Location dialog box

NOTE

2-38

If the network environment is not available, or you can install only the M SDE to save the system
resources, installing the stand-alone edition is recommended.
If a stable network is available, installing the server edition and the SQL Server is recommended.
The SQL Server provides you with better performance services.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 9 Specify an installation path, and then click Next.


The Select Program Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-36.
Figure 2-36 Select Program Folder dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-39

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 10 Click Next.


The Setup Status dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-37.
Figure 2-37 Setup Status dialog box

2-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

After the installation is complete, the Maintenance Complete dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-38.
Figure 2-38 Maintenance Complete dialog box

Step 11 Click Finish.


----End
NOTE

If the M icrosoft Office, GENEX Shared components, and the M SDE are not installed on a computer, the
system prompts you to install them. The Excel component is mandatory.
When upgrading the system, you need not install the GENEX Shared and M SDE again.

2.4 Introduction to the Installation Directory


A complete installation directory includes the Nastar GSM, GENEX Shared common
installation packet, and the MSDE.
Table 2-5 describes the structure of the installation directory.
Table 2-5 Structure of the directory
Directory
Nastar

04 (2008-12-10)

bin

Description
Antenna

Antenna file

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-41

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Directory

Description

GSM

2-42

Autorun

Autorun file

Database

Access database file

CHS

Chinese directory of the task template

Eng

English directory of the task template

License

User authorization file

NEBDLL

Import and export file of neighbor scripts

Project

Storing the project template file

Runtime

Log files created when run Nastar

AlarmVoice

Storing AlamVoice file

Template

Storing the report template file

Tool

StatTrans

Data incising tool

Transdata

Chs

Chinese script directory

Eng

English script directory

Runtime

Log files created when run Transdata

LICENSE

User authentication file

GENEX Shared

GENEX Shared components

MSDE2000

Microsoft desktop engine

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

2.5 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM


2.5.1 Flow Chart
Figure 2-39 shows the flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM.
Figure 2-39 Flow chart of uninstalling the Nastar GSM
Uninstalling
GENEX Shared
Component

Uninstalling Nastar
GSM

Uninstalling
Successfully

2.5.2 Uninstalling the GENEX Shared Components


To uninstall the GENEX Shared component, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-43

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-40.
Figure 2-40 Add or Remove Programs dialog box

Step 2 Select Shared, and then click Change or Remove.


The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-41.

2-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Figure 2-41 Welcome dialog box

Step 3 Select Remove in the Welcome dialog box.


Step 4 Click Next.
The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-42.
Figure 2-42 Confirm Uninstall dialog box

Step 5 Click OK.


After the shared component is uninstalled, the Uninstall Complete dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 2-43.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-45

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Figure 2-43 Uninstall Complete dialog box

Step 6 Click Finish.


----End

2.5.3 Uninstalling the Nastar GSM


To Uninstall the GENEX GSM, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open Control Panel, and then double-click Add or Remove Programs.

2-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

The Add or Remove Programs dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-44.
Figure 2-44 Uninstalling the GENEX GSM dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-47

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Step 2 Select GENEX Nastar GSM, and then click Remove.


The Welcome dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-45.
Figure 2-45 Welcome dialog box

Step 3 Select Remove, and then click Next.


The Confirm Uninstall dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-46.
Figure 2-46 Confirm Uninstall dialog box

Step 4 Click OK.


After the GENEX Nastar GSM is uninstalled, the Uninstall Complete dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 2-47.

2-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

Figure 2-47 Uninstall Complete dialog box

Step 5 Click Finish.


----End

2.6 License Management


2.6.1 Installing the Dongle
When the Nastar GSM is installed completely, you need to install the dongle.
To install the dongle, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Insert the attached dongle drive into the CD-ROM, and then install the dongle drive.
Step 2 Insert the dongle into the parallel port.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-49

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

2 Installat ion of the Nastar GSM

2.6.2 Updating the License


To update the license, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Help > Update License from the menu bar of the Nastar GSM graphical user
interface (GUI). The Open dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select a valid license file from the dialog box.
Step 3 Click Open.
----End

2-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

GUI

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Section

Describes

3.1 Nastar GSM GUI

The introduction to the GUI of the GENEX Nastar GSM.

3.2 GUI of the Transdata

The introduction to the GUI of the GENEX Nastar


Transdata.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.1 Nastar GSM GUI


3.1.1 Introduction to the GUI
Choose start > All Programs > GENEX Nastar > Nastar GSM. The GENEX Nastar GSM
GUI is displayed. The main interface consists of the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, workspace
window, display window, attribute window, and status bar.
Figure 3-1 shows the GUI of the Nastar GSM.
Figure 3-1 GUI of the Nastar GSM

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Table 3-1 describes each item in Nastar GSM GUI.


Table 3-1 Description of the Nastar GSM GUI
Item

Description

Title bar

Workspace window

Menu bar

Toolbar

Display window

Property window

Status bar

3.1.2 Menu Bar


As shown in Figure 3-2, the menu bar comprises Project, Frequency Analysis, Neighbors
Analysis, Analysis Reports, Geographic Display, View, Window, and Help.
Figure 3-2 Menu bar

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Project Menu
Figure 3-3 shows the submenus of the Project menu.
Figure 3-3 Submenus of the Project menu

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Frequency Analysis Menu


Figure 3-4 shows the submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu.
Figure 3-4 Submenus of the Frequency Analysis menu

Neighbors Analysis Menu


Figure 3-5shows the submenus of the Neighbor Analysis menu.
Figure 3-5 Submenus of the Neighbors Analysis menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Analysis Reports Menu


Figure 3-6 shows the submenus of the Analysis Reports menu.
Figure 3-6 Submenus of the Analysis Reports menu

3-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Geographic Display Menu


Figure 3-7 shows the submenus of the Geographic Display menu.
Figure 3-7 Submenus of the Geographic Display menu

View Menu
Figure 3-8 shows the submenus of the View menu.
Figure 3-8 Submenus of the View menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Table 3-2 describes the submenus of the View menu.


Table 3-2 Description of the View menu
Submenu

Description

Toolbar

Displaying or hiding toolbar


If the menu is selected, the toolbar is in the display status and
is under the system menu.

Status bar

Displaying or hiding status bar


The status bar is on the bottom of the main window.

Style

Selecting the window style

Display Legend Window

Displaying or hiding legend window


The legend window lies on the top of the property window.

Display Site Navigator

Displaying or hiding site navigator


The site navigator lies between the workspace and display
window.

Display Workspace

Displaying or hiding workspace


The workspace displays the function structure of the system.

Display Property Sheet

Displaying or hiding property sheet


The property sheet lies on the right of the main window.

Window Menu
The Window menu manages the arrangement style of submenus.
Figure 3-9 shows the submenus of the Window menu.

3-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Figure 3-9 Submenus of the Window menu

Help Menu
The Help menu helps you to learn the software knowledge.
Figure 3-10 shows the submenus of the Help menu.
Figure 3-10 Help menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Table 3-3 describes the submenus of the Help menu.


Table 3-3 Description of the Help menu
Submenu

Description

Content Index

Helping you to search for instructions on how to use the software

About Nastar

Displaying the information such as the version of the GENEX Nastar

Whats New

Displaying the latest information about the GENEX Nastar and after
sales service

ESN Code

Displaying the electronic serial number (ESN) of the license

License Info

Displaying the information about license

Update License

Updating the license when the license is expired

3.1.3 Toolbar
The toolbar comprises the network management, network optimization, map tool and
performance toolbar.

Network Management Toolbar


Figure 3-11 shows the Network Management toolbar.
Figure 3-11 Network Management toolbar

Table 3-4 describes each item of the Network Management toolbar.


Table 3-4 Description of the Network Management toolbar
Item

Description
Creating a site
Editing a site
Deleting a site
Deleting a cell
Searching for a cell

3-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Network Optimization Toolbar


Figure 3-12 shows the Network Optimization toolbar.
Figure 3-12 Network Optimization toolbar

Table 3-5 describes each item in the Network Optimization toolbar.


Table 3-5 Description of the Network Optimization toolbar
Item

Description
Co-frequency and Co-BSIC check
Idle frequency check
Spectrum utilization check
Co-channel and adjacent channel by ARFCN
Co-channel and adjacent channel by cells
Displaying neighbors
Adding bidirectional neighbors
Adding uni-directional neighbors
Deleting neighbors
Saving neighbors
Displaying or hiding reference grid
Switching to layer 900 MHZ or 1800 MHz
Switching to planning neighbors or configuration neighbors
Displaying or hiding workspace
Displaying or hiding navigators
Displaying or hiding the property sheet
Displaying or hiding the legend window

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Map Tool Toolbar


Figure 3-13 shows the Map Tool toolbar.
Figure 3-13 Map Tool toolbar

Table 3-6 describes each item in the Map Tool toolbar.


Table 3-6 Description of the Map Tool toolbar
Item

Description
Moving the map
Justifying the map
Selecting the map
Selecting the map with rectangle
Selecting the map with radius
Zooming in on the map
Zooming out on the map
Default scale map
Measuring the distance
Measuring the angle
Setting the layer
Scanning the map

Performance Toolbar
Figure 3-14 shows the Performance toolbar.
Figure 3-14 Performance toolbar

3-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Table 3-7 describes each item in the Performance toolbar.


Table 3-7 Description of the performance toolbar
Item

Description
Displaying the network optimization theme
Displaying the performance theme

3.1.4 Function Window


The function window is in the right pane of the main window. The function window
comprises Network Element, Network Monitor, Network Trend, Performance Alarm,
and Trouble Shooting.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

NE
Figure 3-15 shows the Network Element pane.
Figure 3-15 Network Element pane

NEs are displayed in navigation tree format. You can perform the following operations:

3-14

Click an NE, the main window shows a map related to the NE in different colors.

Click
and select searching type (By Cell Name or By Cell CI). Enter a cell name or
cell identity (CI) in the right text box. Figure 3-16 shows the related cell in the NE list.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Figure 3-16 Search menu of NE

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Routine Network Monitoring


Figure 3-17 shows the navigation tree of routine network monitoring.
Figure 3-17 Network Monitor pane

3-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Network Trend
Figure 3-18 shows the functions in the Network Trend pane.
Figure 3-18 Network Trend pane

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Performance Alarm
Figure 3-19 shows the functions of performance alarm.
Figure 3-19 Performance Alarm pane

3-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Trouble Shooting
Figure 3-20 shows the functions in the Trouble Shooting pane.
Figure 3-20 Trouble Shooting pane

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.1.5 Property Window


The Property window is in the right pane of the main window. It displays the map legend and
NE property.
Figure 3-21 shows the Property window.
Figure 3-21 Property window

3-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.1.6 Site View


Figure 3-22 shows the Site View window.
Figure 3-22 Site View window

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.2 GUI of the Transdata


3.2.1 Introduction to the GUI of the Transdata
The GUI of the Transdata consists of the title bar, menu bar, toolbar, project view, main view,
output view, and status bar.
Figure 3-23 shows the GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata.
Figure 3-23 GUI of the Nastar GSM Transdata

Table 3-8 describes the GUI of the Transdata.


Table 3-8 Description of the GUI of the Transdata

3-22

Item

Description

Title bar

Menu bar

Toolbar

Main view

Output view

Status bar

Site view

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.2.2 Menu Bar


The menu bar comprises File, View, Tools, and Help.
Figure 3-24 shows the menu bar.
Figure 3-24 Menu bar

File Menu
Figure 3-25 shows the File menu.
Figure 3-25 File menu

Choose File > Exit to quit the system.

View Menu
Figure 3-26 shows the View menu.
Figure 3-26 View menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Table 3-9 describes each item in the View menu of the Transdata.
Table 3-9 Description of the View menu
Item

Description

Toolbar

The toolbar is displayed when Toolbar is selected.

Status bar

The status bar is displayed when Status Bar is selected.

Workspace bar

The workspace bar is displayed when Workspace Bar is


selected.

Open ASSERT file

The open ASSRT file is displayed when Open ASSRT File is


selected.

Refresh

Refresh the interface display

Tools Menu
Figure 3-27 shows the Tools menu.
Figure 3-27 Tools menu

Table 3-10describes each item in the Tool menu of the Transdata.


Table 3-10 Description of the Tool menu
Item

Description

Option

The Option box is displayed when Option is selected.

LogSetting

The Log Setting box is displayed when LogSetting is


selected.

WarningQuery

The Warning Query box is displayed when


WarningQuery is selected

Choose Tools > Options. The Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-28.

3-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Figure 3-28 Options dialog box

For details about the Options dialog box, see section 4.3.3 "Statically Importing Performance
Data."

Help Menu
Figure 3-29 shows Help menu.
Figure 3-29 Help menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

Table 3-11 describes each item in Help menu.


Table 3-11 Description of the Help menu
Item

Description

About Transdata

Shows the information about the Transdata.

ESN code

Shows the ESN code.

Update license

Updates the system license.

Show license info

Shows the information of license.

3.2.3 Toolbar
Figure 3-30 shows the toolbar.
Figure 3-30 Toolbar

Table 3-12 describes the icons on the toolbar.


Table 3-12 Icons on the toolbar
Icon

Description
Click the icon to enable the ADD NET function.
Click the icon to enable the DELETE NET function.
Click the icon to enable the ADD BSC or PCU function.
Click the icon to enable the DELETE BSC function.
Click the icon to enable the DELETE PCU function.
Click the icon to enable the option function.

3-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.2.4 Project View


Figure 3-31 shows the project view.
Figure 3-31 Project view

The information about the network, BSC, and PCU is displayed in the project view. You can
operate the data directly.

3.2.5 Main View


Figure 3-32 shows the main view.
Figure 3-32 Main view

The main view displays the task information, such as the task name, BSC name, file path, data
type, task type, operator, and version. You can use the shortcut menu to operate the task.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

3 GUI

3.2.6 Output Window


Figure 3-33 shows the output window.
Figure 3-33 Output window

The output window displays the procedures for the task operation. You can double-click the
window and choose Put in File to save the message in the output window or choose Clear
msg list to clear the message.

3-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Using the Transdata

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Title

Description

4.1 Basic Operation

The basic operations of the Transdata.

4.2 NE Operations

The creating, deletion, and upgrade of NEs.

4.3 Data Management

The data management of the Transdata.

4.4 Task Management

The initialization, backup, and deletion of a task.

4.5 Drawing Out Data and


Importing Data File

The drawing out and importing of data file.

4.6 Transdata Maintainability


Operation

The maintainability operations of the Transdata.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

4.1 Basic Operation


4.1.1 Starting the SQL Server
Before using the Nastar GSM, you need to install the SQL Server on the server. The server
can be either a PC or a laptop. Run Service Manager and start SQL Server Service
Manager. Huawei recommends that you select Auto-start service when OS starts in the
SQL Server Service Manager dialog box. When you use the MSDE, you need to perform
the previous operations.

If SQL Server Service Manager starts successfully, the database status prompt icon is
displayed in the Windows task bar. If the SQL Server runs as a system service in the
background, check the status of the SQL Server Service Manager.

If you do not use the service manager, the database status prompt icon is not displayed in
task bar.

Figure 4-1 shows the SQL Server Service Manager dialog box.
Figure 4-1 SQL Server Service Manager dialog box

The system does not support the import from a remote server. The remote import indicates
that the Transdata accesses the SQL Server through the LAN and imports data.

4.1.2 Starting the Transdata


Background
The Transdata is a data import module, which imports the performance data, BSC
configuration data, and PCU configuration data to the SQL Server database. The Transdata
also provides the following functions:

4-2

Enabling you to view the result of the registration of performance data

Displaying the information about the current database

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Backing up the current task information

Procedures
To start the Transdata, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Run the Transdata.exe file.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-2 Login dialog box

Step 2 Click Option.


The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3
Figure 4-3 Login dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Table 4-1 describes the elements in the Login dialog box.


Table 4-1 Description of the Login dialog box
Element

Description

User Name

Enter the user name.

Password

Enter the password.

Remember Password

If you select Remember Password, you need not enter the


user name and password next time.

Nastar Server

Enter the name of the SQL Server and service name.


The server name can be the computer name or the IP address
of the server.

Delete&Clear Database

In stand-alone mode, you can enter the server name


as .\service name.

In server mode, you need to enter the server name or IP


address\service name.

If you select Delete&Clear Database, the Transdata


deletes all the local networks and BSCs.
If you plan to create a new Nastar database, select
Delete&Clear Database.
Unexpected errors may happen if you select Delete&Clear
Database. Huawei recommends that you should not select
this option.

Step 3 Enter the user name and password in the User Name and Password fields respectively.
Step 4 Enter the server name and service name in the Nastar Server field.
Step 5 Click OK.

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

The main interface of the Transdata is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-4.


Figure 4-4 Main interface of the Transdata

----End

4.1.3 Closing the Transdata


Background
If the Transdata is started, it can be minimized to the task bar. You can close the Transdata
through

on the task bar.

Procedures
To close the Transdata, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Use either of the following methods to close the Transdata:

Choose File > Exit to close the Transdata.

Click
in the upper right window to minimize the Transdata, and then right-click
on the task bar.
The Quit menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 Quit menu

Choose Quit from the shortcut menu.


The Quit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-6.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-6 Quit dialog box

Step 2 Enter the password in the Password field.


Step 3 Click OK.
----End

4.2 NE Operations
4.2.1 Creating a Network
To create a network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. You can also right-click GSM, and then choose Add Net from the
shortcut menu.
The Network Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-7.

4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-7 Network Information dialog box

Table 4-2 describes the elements in the Network Information dialog box.
Table 4-2 Elements in the Network Information dialog box
Element

Description

Radio Network Info

Database Info

Network Name

Enter the name of the local network.

Operator

Select an operator from the Operator


drop-down list.

Database Name

Enter a name for the database.

Driver

Select a disk letter from the Driver


drop-down list.
Driver indicates the disk letter on the server
instead of on the local disk.
If you do not select the disk letter, the
default driver is used.
NOTE
Before importing database to the database server,
check whether the selected disk on the server is
available.

File Name

04 (2008-12-10)

The File Name field shows the directory of


the database after Database Name and
Driver are set.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Element

Description

Radio Network Description

Enter the description of the local network.


The Radio Network Description field is
optional.

Step 2 Type the name of the local network in the Network Name field.
Step 3 Select an operator from the Operator drop-down list.
Step 4 Click OK.
A local network is created.
----End

4.2.2 Creating a BSC


To create a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click
on the toolbar. You can also right-click a network, and then choose Add
BSC\PCU from the shortcut menu.
The Add BSC\PCU dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-8 Add BSC\PCU dialog box

Step 2 Click Add.


The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-9.

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-9 Adding BSC\PCU

NOTE

You can create a maximum of four BSCs simultaneously.


You can click Add to create one BSC, and then click Delete to delete a BSC.

Step 3 Enter a BSC name in the BSC\PCU Name field.


Step 4 Select the vendor HUAWEIBSC32 from the Vendor drop-down list.
NOTE

If you select HUAWEIBS C6000 from the Vendor drop-down list, the BSC6000 is created.

Step 5 Select a BSC32 or BSC6000 version from the BSC\PCU Version drop-down list.
Step 6 Click OK to create a BSC32 or BSC6000.
The created result is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-10.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-10 Creating BSC32

----End

4-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-11 shows the result of creating the BSC6000.


Figure 4-11 Creating BSC6000

If the BSC name is not unique, an information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
4-12.
Figure 4-12 Information dialog box

Step 7 Click OK, and then add a BSC again.


NOTE

As shown in Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-11, you can infer that vendor BSC6000 has three more tasks than
BSC32, that is, the Import CHR Data, Delete CHR Data, and Import BS C6000 Freq Data.

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

4.2.3 Upgrading a BSC


This task is performed to upgrade the BSC32, BSC6000, and other vendor versions. The PCU
is excluded.
To upgrade a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose a BSC in the project view window.
Step 2 Right-click the BSC and choose Upgrade BSC from the displayed shortcut menu.
The BSC Upgrade dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-13.
Figure 4-13 BSC Upgrade dialog box

Step 3 Select the version to be upgraded from the Version drop-down list. Click OK to upgrade the
BSC version selected.
----End

4.2.4 Deleting a BSC


To delete a BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a BSC, and then choose Delete BSC from the shortcut menu. You can also choose
a BSC, and then click
on the toolbar.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Confirmation dialog box

4-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 2 Click OK.


The selected BSC is deleted.
----End

4.2.5 Adding a PCU


To add a PCU in the network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a network from the project view window. Right-click the selected network, and then
choose Add BSC\PCU from the shortcut menu. You can also click

on the toolbar.

The Add BSC\PCU dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-15.


Figure 4-15 Add BSC\PCU dialog box

Step 2 Click Add.


The following dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-16.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-16 Adding PCU dialog box

Step 3 Enter the PCU name in the BSC\PCU Name field.


Step 4 Select HuaweiPCU from the Vendor drop-down list.
Step 5 Select a PCU version from the BSC\PCU Version drop-down list.
Step 6 Click OK.

If the PCU is created successfully, the system displays the following message, as shown
in Figure 4-17.

Figure 4-17 Success load message

If the PCU name already exists, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-18 Information dialog box

4-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 7 Click OK, and then create a PCU again.


----End

4.2.6 Deleting a PCU


The procedures for deleting a PCU are similar to the procedures for deleting a BSC. To delete
a PCU, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a PCU from the NE list in the project view window, and then choose Delete PCU.
You can also choose a PCU, and then click

on the toolbar.

The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-19.


Figure 4-19 Confirmation dialog box

Step 2 Click OK.


The PCU is deleted.
----End

4.2.7 Deleting a Network


To delete a network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click an NE from the NE list in project view window, and then choose Del Net from the
shortcut menu
Figure 4-20 shows the shortcut menu.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-20 Shortcut menu

You can also choose the NET, and then click

on the toolbar.

The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-21.


Figure 4-21 Confirmation dialog box

Step 2 Click OK.


----End

4.2.8 Network Swap


The network swap refers to swapping the network of other vendors for the network of
Huawei.
If you need to analyze the information about other vendors, the information must be swapped
in the Transdata and then is analyzed in the Nastar GSM.
To swap cells for Huawei networks, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Create an OTHERS network. For details about how to create an OTHERS network, see
section 4.2.1 "Creating a Network." Select OTHERS from the Operator drop-down list.

4-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 2 Create an OTHERS node. For details about how to create an OTHERS node, see section
4.2.2 "Creating a BSC." Select OTHERS from the Vendor drop-down list.
Step 3 Choose the data to be swapped under the OTHERS node, and then import the swap data. For
details, see section 4.3.1 "Importing BSC Configuration Data. "
Step 4 Right-click the NE to be swapped for Huawei in the project view window, and then choose
Swap Cells to This Net from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-22.
Figure 4-22 Shortcut menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

The Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-23.
Figure 4-23 Swap Cell Configuration Setting dialog box

Step 5 Set parameters in the Swap Cell Configuration setting dialog box.
1.
2.

Select an operator to be swapped;


Set Cell map file path, Data Setting, and the Cell Match Option;

3.

Click OK to complete the data swap from others to Huawei vendor. Figure 4-24 shows
the swap success messages.
You can click CellMap Setting to set the cell map.

Figure 4-24 Swap success messages

----End

4-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata


NOTE

When the system prompts you to match fields, you need to match the fields during network swap. For
other fields, choose ItemIn dex.
In the Cell map file field, click
to select a data mapping table. The table refers to the .xls file that
comprises the following information:

Cell name of the original vendor

The mapping between the LAC and CI of the original vendor and the LAC and CI of Huawei

The BSC to which the cell belongs after the network swap

4.2.9 Version Matching


After the new products, namely, BSC32, BSC6000, and PCU are introduced to the GSM
network, the data about the BSCs that are not available on the original network can be
automatically added to the database through the function of version matching.
To enable the function of version matching, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Tool > Update Vendor from the menu.
The Version Update dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 Version Update dialog box

Step 2 Click
Figure 4-26.

04 (2008-12-10)

. Select the upgrade package for version matching in the dialog box shown in

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-26 Selecting the upgrade package matched with the version

Step 3 Select the BSC type from the Vendor drop-down list box, and then click OK.
The system automatically finishes version matching.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-27.
Step 4 Click OK.
Figure 4-27 Update Version successfully

Step 5 Verify that the version matching is successful by referring to section 4.2.2 "Creating a BSC."
----End

4-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

4.3 Data Management


4.3.1 Importing BSC Configuration Data
To import BSC configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the project view window, select a BSC whose vendor is not the BSC6000.
The BSC information on the main view window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-28.
Figure 4-28 BSC information

Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import OMC Data row.
The

button is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-29.

Figure 4-29 Button in the File Path column

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 3 Click

The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 4 Select the directory of BSC configuration data.


The default file of the BSC32 is .\dbf. Click OK.
Step 5 Right-click Import OMC Data and choose Update OMC Data from the shortcut menu.
After the data is imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-31.
Figure 4-31 Successful import of configuration data

----End

4-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata


NOTE

The procedures for importing the configuration data of vendor BSC6000 are similar.

4.3.2 Importing PCU Configuration Data


To import PCU configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a PCU from the project view window.
The PCU information is displayed in the main view window, as shown in Figure 4-32.
Figure 4-32 PCU information dialog box

Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import OMC Data row.
The

button is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-33.

Figure 4-33 The button in file path

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 3 Click

, as shown in Figure 4-33.

The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-34.
Figure 4-34 Browse for Folder

Step 4 Specify a directory for storing the PCU configuration data from the Browse for Folder dialog
box, and then click OK.
The default file is ".\config.ini".
Step 5 Right-click Import OMC Data and choose Import PCU Config Data from the shortcut
menu.
After the data is imported, the following information is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-35.
Figure 4-35 Successful import of configuration data

----End

4-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

CAUTION
You should import the configuration data first. The Import Stat Data function is invalid after
you create the PCU. Only when configuration data is imported, you can import the
performance data.

4.3.3 Statically Importing Performance Data


Configuring the Import of Performance Data
To configure the import of performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-36.
Figure 4-36 Options dialog box

Step 2 Type the data cycle time in the Data Cycle field.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

The unit of time is minute.


Step 3 If you plan to choose the data that has the same data cycle, select Only Import the same
cycle data.
Step 4 If you plan to validate the correctness of performance data, select Verify Statistic Data.
Step 5 If you plan to set the system to import all data by default and hide the time configuration
dialog box, select Do not show time config and import all data.
Step 6 If you plan to set the system to delete statistic data automatically, select Delete statistic data
automatically.
Step 7 In the Delete all special items days ago field, enter the value that indicates the interval you
plan to delete special items.
Step 8 Set the system to enter the days to delete all common items once in the Delete all common
item days ago field.
Step 9 In the Delete CHR Records day(s) ago field, enter the value that indicates how many days
you plan to delete CHR records.
Step 10 If you plan to backup OMC configuration data, select Backup OMC As Plan.
Step 11 If the Backup OMC As Plan is selected, you need to set the backup cycle and the begin time.
Step 12 Click OK.
----End
NOTE

You need to back up and delete the runtime file timely.


You need to back up the log files under the Bin\Runtime directory. A large amount of log files occupies
too much disk space and decrease system performance.
For the data segmented by the Stattrans or dynamically segmented by t he NAConvert, do not select
Verify Statistic Data. Otherwise, the data cannot be imported.

Statically Importing Performance Data


To statically import the performance data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a BSC from the project view window shown in Figure 4-28.
Step 2 Click the cell in the File Path column of the Import Stat Data row.
The
Step 3 Click

button is displayed.
.

The Browse for Folder dialog box displayed.


Step 4 Choose the path of BSC performance data from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and then
click OK.
Step 5 Right-click Import Stat Data task on the main view window.
The Statistic Data Import menu item is added to the shortcut menu.

4-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 6 Choose Statistic Data Import from the shortcut menu.


The Tasks Information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-37.
Figure 4-37 Tasks Information dialog box

Step 7 Select Import all statistic data.


Step 8 Set the start date and end date in the Input Date field.
Step 9 Set the start time and end time in the Input Time field.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 10 Click Check Task Time.


The Check Task Time dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-38.
Figure 4-38 Check Task Time dialog box

Step 11 All the tasks are selected by default. Choose the analysis task to be imported, and then click
OK to return to the Tasks Information dialog box.
Step 12 Click OK.
After the performance data is successfully imported, the following information is displayed,
as shown in Figure 4-39.
Figure 4-39 Import success information

----End
NOTE

Before you statically import the statistic traffic data, ensure that the configuration data of the current
BSC is imported, and the path for the traffic statistic data in the statistic data directory is valid.

4-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

4.3.4 Dynamically Importing Performance Data


To import performance data dynamically, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a created BSC from the main view window, as shown in Figure 4-40.
Figure 4-40 Created BSC

Step 2 Choose the performance data file to be dynamically imported from the File Path in the main
view window. For details, see section 4.3.1 "Importing BSC Configuration Data."
Step 3 Right-click a task name in the main view window, and then choose Task Setting from the
shortcut menu.
The Import Task setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-41.
Figure 4-41 Import Task setting dialog box

Step 4 Click Advance.


The Import Task Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-42.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-29

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-42 Import Task setting dialog box

Step 5 Select Execute As Plan, and the dynamically import setting is finished, as shown in Figure
4-43.

4-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-43 dynamically import setting dialog box

The system imports data dynamically and the Transdata checks whether new performance
data is uploaded in real time. If the new data is uploaded, import the data.
When click the each BSC/PCU, the property Import Server IP displays the IP address of the
database server imported. There are three states for each BSC/PCU of the Transdata, as
follows:

04 (2008-12-10)

Has not been set to import automatically state by any Transdata, the icon is

Has been set to import automatically state by local computer, the icon is

Has been set to import automatically state by the other one computer, the icon is
.
When the users want to modify the BSC/PCU state, the system display a dialog box, as
shown in Figure 4-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

.
.

4-31

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-44 The parameters can not be modified

----End
NOTE

Trigger Time in Execute As Plan refers to the interval during which the dynamical import is performed.
You can choose Every 5 Minutes, Every 30 Minutes, Every 1 Hour, or Every 24 Hours.
Enable Time refers to the first time to perform the task. If you log in to the Transdata again, the
dynamic trigger time count from the Transdata program starting running time rather than Enable Time.
Do not process refers to that you need not process the imported data, and Delete all data file import
refers to that you can delete the imported data.

4.3.5 Deleting History Data


You can delete the expired data from the current NET to spare more space for the database.
To delete the history data of the NET, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET node from the project view window, and then choose Del History Data
from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 4-45.
Figure 4-45 Shortcut menu

4-32

If no history data exists in the NET, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-46 Information dialog box

If history data exists in the NET, the History Data dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 4-47.
Figure 4-47 History Data dialog box

Step 2 Specify the date range within which the data to be deleted, or select Delete all history data to
delete all history data.
Step 3 If you plan to compress the database, select Shrink Database.
Step 4 If you plan to delete the common data, select Delete common data.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

4.4 Task Management


4.4.1 Initializing a Task
If you initialize a task, all the created and modified tasks are missing and the task is restored
to the initial status. This task is performed only when a large amount of tasks are damaged or
unavailable on a local network.
To initialize a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET node in the project view window.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-33

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.


Figure 4-48 Shortcut menu

Step 2 Choose Initial Task from the shortcut menu to initialize a task.
A message is displayed, indicating the initialization of a task, as shown in Figure 4-49.
Figure 4-49 Message displayed during task initialization

----End

4.4.2 Backing Up a Task


Backing up a task refers to backing up the information about new or modified tasks to
\TASK\Backup\. After you modify a great number of tasks or perform important operations,
Huawei recommends that the server administrator or the user backs up the task periodically.
To back up a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET from the project view window.

4-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

A shortcut menu displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.


Step 2 Choose Backup Task from the shortcut menu to back up the task.
A message is displayed, prompting you that backing up a task successfully, as shown in
Figure 4-50.
Figure 4-50 Message of task backup

----End
NOTE

The system saves only the information about the latest backup task. If you want to save the task backup
information in different periods, you can manually copy the following BCP files to \TAS K\Backup\.

CommItemDict.bcp

CommStatTableDesc.bcp

CommTableIdx.bcp

Erl_b.bcp

GRAPHDRAWITEM S.bcp

PRESQL.bcp

ITEDRAWITEM S.bcp

TASKEXP.bcp

TASKS.bcp

If you want to restore the task information, you can copy the nine files that you have saved to the
directory \TAS K\Backup\.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-35

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

4.4.3 Restoring a Task


You can restore a task by using the relevant backup file. If you plan to restore the task, copy
the nine backup files to the \TASK\Backup\ directory.
To restore a task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a NET from the project view window.
A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Step 2 Choose Resume Task from the shortcut menu to restore a task.
A message is displayed, prompting you to restore the task.
Figure 4-51 shows the displayed message.
Figure 4-51 Message of task restore

----End

4.5 Drawing Out Data and Importing Data File


4.5.1 Drawing Out Data
The draw out data function exports files from the following tables:

Cell information table


BSC information table
Common statistic index of BSCs
Common statistic index of CELLs

The draw out data can delete the history statistic data for keeping running the system
high-powered. To draw out data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Step 2 Choose KPI Backup Data from the shortcut menu, and then perform the draw out data, as
shown in Figure 4-52.

4-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-52 Draw out data

Step 3 Click Browse to choose the data file path.


The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-53.
Figure 4-53 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 4 Change the file name in the file name field.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-37

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

You can also use the default file name.


Step 5 Set the date range for data drew out in Period of date.
The default value is the time of database.
Step 6 Set Other Option.

If the Delete data after draw out is selected, deleted data after draw out.

If the Delete data after draw out is not selected, do not delete data after draw out.

Step 7 Click OK to perform the draw out data, as shown in Figure 4-54.
Figure 4-54 The prompt of drawing out data successfully

----End

4.5.2 Importing Data File


When you need to analyze and forecast the network trend, you can import the key data to
analyze. For example, you need to analyze the network trend of the latest three months, but
you have only data of the latest one month. In this case, you can import other two months data
to database, and then perform the analyzing. You can delete the history data after analyzing.
To import data files, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click a network in the project view.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-48.
Step 2 Choose KPI Restore Data from the shortcut menu, and then perform the import the data file.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-55.

4-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-55 Data import

Step 3 Choose the file need to be imported, and then click Open.
The Restore time select dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-56.
Figure 4-56 Restore time select

Step 4 Set the start time and end time for data.
Step 5 Click OK, and then perform the importing the data file.
The import successfully prompt is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-57.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-39

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-57 The prompt of importing successfully

----End

4.6 Transdata Maintainability Operation


4.6.1 Importing Data Warning Monitor
The warning monitor function is to track and record exceptions of importing data
automatically, during the Transdata running.
To set the warning monitor, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Tool> Warning Query.
The Exception Watch dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-58.
Figure 4-58 Exception Watch

Step 2 Specify the query type from the Select Type drop-down list.
There are CHR Data, OMC Data and Stat Data, the default selection is CHR Data.
Step 3 Select the NET name from the Select NET drop-down list.
Step 4 Set the start date and end date of warning.
Step 5 Set the save days in the Data Hold Day drop-down list.
Step 6 Click Query to perform the warning query.

4-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Step 7 Click Save as Excel to save the result queried to excel.


----End

4.6.2 Log
The log records help to locate the problems.
To set the log, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Tools>LogSetting.
The Log Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-59.
Figure 4-59 Log Setting

Step 2 Click

to set file path.

The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-60.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-41

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

4 Using the Transdata

Figure 4-60 Browse for Folder

Step 3 Select the period of log file generating from File Generate interval drop-down list.
You can choose 1 hour, 3 hour, 6 hours, or 1 day.
Step 4 Choose the save days of log file from the File hold day drop-down list to delete the recorded
log before N days.
NOTE

Current log file displays the current log located path. The default path of log file is the subdirectory of
installation directory, and the name of subdirectory is Log.

Step 5 Click OK.


----End

4-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Common Operations

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Section

Describes

5.1 Project Management

The management of projects, including the creation of a


project, starting of a project, modification of a project,
deletion of a project, and switch of a project.

5.2 Data Management

The management of data, including the configuration


parameter import, management of project parameter,
management of performance data, and parameter check.

5.3 User Management

The management of user access rights and user log.

5.4 Managing NEs

How to manage NEs, including the creation, edition,


movement, and deletion of a site.

5.5 Managing Map

How to import or operate a map and how to manage a


map or map layers.

5.6 Setting the Analysis


Conditions

The common settings.

5.7 Processing the Analysis


Result

How to process analysis results.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.1 Project Management


5.1.1 Introduction to the Project Management
The Nastar GSM client organizes and manages data through a project. The project defines the
available operations and operable data, and saves the operation results.
The common operations are as follows:

A project has two connection modes, namely, online mode and local mode. The Nastar
GSM provides different functions for different connection modes. For details, see section
1.1.5 "Stand-Alone Mode."

A project defines the overall configurations, which include the connection mode, server
address, local network analysis, start time, end time, and busy time for traffic statistic
analys is. The project also comprises the project information and configuration used to
support network optimization analysis.
A project saves the network analysis results. Each time you open the project, you can
continue the network optimization analys is based on the previous network optimization
analys is.

The SQL Server stores the information about one or multiple local networks, such as traffic
statistic data and configuration data. The online mode project analyzes the associated local
network and a local network on the server and contains several projects. The projects are
independent from each other.
The client program provides the project management function, such as creating, configuring,
and deleting a project.

5.1.2 Creating a Project


To create a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-1.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-1 Login dialog box

Step 2 Click Setting.


The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-2 Project Setting dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The Project list area in the left pane lists all the current available projects. The right panel
shows the configuration of the selected project. You can modify the configuration.
Step 3 Click Add.
The New Project dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 New Project dialog box

Step 4 Enter a name for the new project, and then click OK.
The new project is displayed in the Project list area, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-4 New project in the Project Setting dialog box

Step 5 Set the configuration in the right pane.

5-4

Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list.


Select the server settings.

Select a map file.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations
NOTE

You can select Online from the Mode drop-down list and select the data server to analyze traffic
statistics. The import of a map file is optional. To import a map file, click

to select the map file.

Step 6 Click OK.


----End

5.1.3 Opening a Project


If engineers need to analyze the performance data, ensure that the performance data is
available.

Opening a Project for the First Time


To open a new project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-5 Login dialog box

Step 2 Select a project from the Project name drop-down list.


Step 3 Type the user name and password in the User and Password fields.
NOTE

If you select Remember Password, you need not type the user name and password next time.

Step 4 Click OK.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The project is opened and the relevant information is displayed on the main program screen.
----End

NOTE

The default path of each project on the local host is Nastar folder path\project\project name. You can
copy a local project to the corresponding path, for example, Nastar folder path\project\project name on
another host with the Nastar GSM client.

Switching to Another Project


To switch to another project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Open Project.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-6 shows the Project menu.
Figure 5-6 Project menu

Step 2 Select another project from the Project Name drop-down list.
Step 3 Click OK.
----End

5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.1.4 Modifying and Deleting a Project


Modifying a Project
To modify a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Step 2 Click Setting
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Step 3 Select a project in Project list.
The right pane shows the configurations of the selected project.
Step 4 Set the configuration in the right pane of the new project.

Select Online or Local from the Mode drop-down list.


If you select Online Mode, you need to set the server name, the database name, the login
user name, and other configuration.

Set the server settings.


You can type the database name directly, or click

to select the database.

Select a map file.


Importing a map file is optional. To import a map file, click

to select the map file.

Step 5 Click OK.


You can save the configuration.
----End

Deleting a Project
To delete a project, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM client.
The Login dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
Step 2 Click Setting
The Project Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-4.
Step 3 Select a project in Project list.
Step 4 Click Delete.
The project is removed from Project list.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.2 Data Management


5.2.1 Introduction to Data Management
The Nastar GSM supports the network optimization data, Huawei BSC optimization data, and
Huawei PCU optimization data. The GENEX GSM Transdata supports the task management
of data. For example, the GENEX GSM Transdata allows you to import data, export data, and
delete data. You can also set the task performance time, data path, and data process method.
The GENEX Nastar performs automatic data management.
The following sections describe the data type, data source, general operations, and operation
location in the Nastar GSM.

Data Type
The Nastar GSM supports engineering data, configuration data, and performance data. The
supported data is as follows:

Engineering data

BSC32

Configuration data

Performance data

BSC6000

Configuration data
Performance data

CHR data

Uplink frequency point scan log

PCU

Configuration data

Performance data

Data Sources
When importing data, you need to choose proper data sources.
Table 5-1 lists data sources.
Table 5-1 Data sources
Data Type

Data Source

Engineering data

.xls file

Configuration data

5-8

BSC32

.dbf file

BSC6000

.dat file

PCU

Config.ini file

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Data Type

Data Source

Performance data

BSC32

.RES file

BSC6000

MRF file

PCU

Key performance index (KPI) file

CHR data

BSC6000

.GZIP file

Uplink frequency
point scan data

BSC6000

.FRQLOG file

Common Operations
The common operations include data import and data export.
Table 5-2 describes the import data supported by the Nastar GSM.
Table 5-2 Import data supported by the Nastar GSM
Data

Data Description

Project
parameter

The project parameters supports the details about the BTS, whose key
information is as follows:
BTS name

BTS longitude

BTS latitude

Cell name

Location area code (LAC)


Cell identity (CI)

Neighbor
information

Configuration
data

Digital map

Antenna azimuth
Antenna declination angle

The neighbor information is as follows:

Supporting the horizontal and vertical import of neighbor relations

Supporting the neighboring files of a third vendor

The configuration data includes the configuration parameter for cell and
neighbor relations. You can import BTS configuration parameters of more
than one vendor, which is as follows:
Huawei G3BSC32.20100.06.1120A, BSC6000, PCU, and later versions.

Alcatel BSC72 version

Siemens BSS BR60

Ericsson BSS R10

Motorola BSS R6, BSS R7

Supporting the import of the digital map in Mapinfo format


The data is in .tab or .gst format.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Data

Data Description

Performance
data

Supporting the import of the performance data of the following released


versions:

Huawei BSC32

Huawei BSC6000

PCU

The Nastar GSM can export the following types of data:

Project parameter

Configuration parameter

Neighboring cells in horizontal and vertical format

Huawei project parameters


The parameters are exported in .xls format.

The Nastar GSM can export the following optimization reports:

Daily report

Weekly report

Monthly report

Network monitoring report

Configuration check reports

Measurement report

Comprehensive analysis report


The query result is exported in .xls format.

The results that are displayed in chart are stored in the following formats:

TeeChart Pro files : .tee

Enhanced Metafiles : .emf

Metafiles : .wmf
BMP

JPG
GIF

PCX

PDF

PostScript

The Nastar GSM supports the export of the local maintenance terminal (LMT) support script
of the BSC32 or BSC6000. The script is in .txt format.

5-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Operation Location
Different data is configured by different programs.

The operation of engineering data, neighbor cell information, and data map performed in
the GENEX Nastar GSM

The operation of configuration data, performance data, CHR data and uplink frequency
data performed in the GENEX Nastar Transdata

5.2.2 Management of Configuration Data


According to the different models of NEs, the import mode of configuration parameter is
different. Table 5-3 describes the import mode of configuration parameters of each NE.
Table 5-3 Importing configuration parameter mode
NEs Model

Importing Configuration Parameter Mode

Imports the configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM


directly.

HUAWEI BSC32
Alcatel

Siemens

Ericsson

Motorola

HUAWEI PCU

HUAWEI BSC6000

After the data is imported in the Transdata, the


configuration parameters are imported through the
function of download configuration parameters in the
Nastar GSM.

On a local PC, you can directly import the configuration parameters in the Nastar GSM.
Table 5-4 describes the following requirements:

04 (2008-12-10)

Requirement of configuration parameter data

Requirement of configuration parameter version


Requirement files for configuration parameters

Import procedure

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Table 5-4 Related configuration parameter requirement


Configuration Parameter

Description

Requirement of configuration parameter


data

Before importing configuration


parameter, ensure that the project
parameter is imported. The configuration
parameters can be imported provided that
the cell information of the project exists.
Otherwise, all the configuration
parameters fail to be imported.

The LAC and CI of a cell in the


configuration parameters must be the
same as those imported in the project
parameters. Only when the cells in the
configuration data match those in the
opened project, the cell configuration data
can be imported successfully.

G3BSC32V300R002C10

G3BSC32V300R002C11

G3BSC32V300R002C12

G3BSC32V300R002C13

G3BSC32V300R006C01

G3BSC32V300R006C02
G3BSC32V300R007C01

G3BSC32V300R007C02

Alcatel configuration
data

BSC72

Siemens configuration
data

BR6.0

Requirement of
configuration
parameter version

5-12

Huawei configuration
data

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Configuration Parameter

Description

Requirement files
for configuration
parameters

Celldesc.dbf

Symgdatl.dbf
Rccfg.dbf

Cellattr.dbf

Bsccell.dbf

Callctrl.dbf

Cellcfg.dbf
Swctrl.dbf

Nebcell.dbf

Nordata.dbf

Clsdata.dbf
Urgedat.dbf

Pwrctls.dbf

Freechpr.dbf
Btspwrc.dbf

Mspwrc.dbf

Hw2pwrct.dbf

Celcalmp.dbf

Huawei configuration
data

NOTE
The configuration parameters can also be
imported if one of the previous files does not
exist, but you cannot guarantee the integrality of
the Huawei configuration data.

Alcatel configuration
data

Siemens configuration
data

Cell.csv

rnlPowerControl.csv

HoControl.csv

.asv file

Importing Huawei Configuration Parameters


To import Huawei configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Huawei.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-7.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-7 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 2 Select the directory of Huawei configuration parameters (.dbf), and then click OK to start the
import.
The information dialog box is displayed, as shown Figure 5-8.
Figure 5-8 Information dialog box

You can choose whether to export the Huawei configuration data initial table.

5-14

Click Yes to generate a report.


Click No not to generate a report.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 3 Click Yes to save Huawei configuration data.


The progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-9.
Figure 5-9 Progress bar

The system automatically saves Huawei configuration parameters and displays the number of
all imported records and the number of updated records.
The total records information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-10.
Figure 5-10 Total Records information dialog box

Step 4 Click OK.


The reloading cell information is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-11.
Figure 5-11 Reloading cell information and Huawei neighbor relations wait progress bar

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The Neb Configuration dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-12.


Figure 5-12 Neb Configuration dialog box

----End

Importing Alcatel Configuration Parameters


To import Alcatel configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Alcatel.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-13.
Figure 5-13 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 2 Select the folder of Alcatel configuration parameters (.csv), and then click OK to start the
import.
The information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-14.

5-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-14 Information dialog box

Click Yes to generate the report.

Click No not to generate the report.

----End

Importing Siemens Configuration Parameters


To import Siemens configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Config Parameters > Siemens.
The Choose Siemens configuration file dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-15.
Figure 5-15 Please choose Siemens configure file dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 Select the directory for Siemens configuration parameters (.ASC), and then click Open to
start the import.
An information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-16.
Figure 5-16 Information dialog box

Click Yes to generate the report.

Click No not to generate the report.

----End

Downloading Configuration Data


The function of downloading configuration data is applied in online mode. When the
configuration parameters are downloaded from the server, the vendor parameters in cell
property are updated and some project parameters are updated.
To download configuration data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Import the configuration parameter data in Transdata.
Step 2 Download the configuration parameter data in the Nastar GSM to import configuration
parameters.
----End
The configuration data consists of the following project parameters:

BSC Name
BISC

Traffic channel (TCH)

FH Mode

HSN

MA

Equ Type

Vendor
TRXs

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

To download the configuration parameters and update the project parameters, perform the
following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Download Config Parameters.
Step 2 Download the configuration parameters from the server.
The Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-17.
Figure 5-17 Synchronization Report dialog box

Step 3 Click OK.


Step 4 Close the Synchronization Report dialog box. You can also click Output to export the
match result in an .xls file.
The output result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-18.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-18 Output result window

----End

Displaying Configuration Parameters


After the configuration parameters are downloaded successfully, they are displayed on the
Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter tab page in the Property pane.
Figure 5-19 shows the Huawei GRPS cell parameter pane.

5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-19 Huawei GPRS Cell Parameter pane

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Exporting the Configuration Parameters of Huawei (Alcatel, Siemens)


To export the configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters.
Step 2 Choose a submenu of Export Config Parameters (Huawei, Alcatel, Siemens or Motorola).
The Export Configuration Parameters submenu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-20.
Figure 5-20 Submenu of exporting configuration parameters

Figure 5-21 shows the configuration parameter table.


Figure 5-21 Configuration parameter table exported in an .xls file

----End

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Exporting Huawei PCU Configuration Parameters


To export Huawei PCU configuration parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Config Parameters > Huawei (PCU).
The Output PCU Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 Output PCU Config. dialog box

Step 2 Select the configuration parameters of the PCU.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 3 Click OK.


The configuration parameters exported in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-23.
Figure 5-23 Configuration parameter exported in an .xls file

----End

5.2.3 Managing Project Parameters


This section describes how to manage project parameters in the Nastar GSM.

Importing Project Parameters


To import project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Import Project Parameters.

5-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-24.


Figure 5-24 Open dialog box

Step 2 Select the .xls file that contains project parameters, and then click Open.
The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-25.
Figure 5-25 Select Table dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 3 Select the project parameter table to be imported, and then click OK.
The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-26.
Figure 5-26 Import Setting dialog box

When select Cell Property -> Userdef1~Userdef10, then pop-up User Defined Parameter
dialog box. Click OK button will save it after user input name of self-defined parameter

Step 4 Set the imported data.


The system automatically identifies and matches some fields based on the project parameter
table. For the unmatched or wrongly matched items, click the first column in the dialog box,
and select the associated field from the shortcut menu.
Click OK.
The confirmation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-27.

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-27 Confirming information dialog box

Step 5 If the confirm information dialog box lists some unmatched fields, click OK to proceed with
the task. Otherwise, click Cancel to rematch the fields.
Step 6 Click OK.
The project parameters are successfully imported, as shown in Figure 5-28.
Figure 5-28 Successfully importing the project parameter

The previous dialog box displays the number of imported and non-imported records. Click
OK. The .xls file to show the non-imported records and show the wrongly imported field in
red is displayed.
NOTE

04 (2008-12-10)

If you want to replace the configuration database in the previous site with the project parameter table
to be imported, ensure that you have selected Clear Database in the dialog box.

When the data setting is imported, the units of longitude and latitude are degree, minute, second, or
decimalization based on the data type of the project parameters.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

CAUTION
The description of latitude and longitude is as follows:
Latitude: 0 to 90 degree refers to the northern hemisphere and 90 to 0 degree refers to the
southern hemisphere.
Longitude: 0 to 180 degree refers to the eastern hemisphere and 180 to 0 degree refers to the
western hemisphere.
----End

Exporting Project Parameters


To export the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.
The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-29.
Figure 5-29 Output dialog box

Step 2 In the Output dialog box, select the project parameters to be exported.
Step 3 Click OK to export the project parameters of the current project.
5-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

----End

Comparing Project Parameters


To compare the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Compare Project Parameters.
The menu of Compare Project Parameters is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-30.
Figure 5-30 Compare project parameters menu

Step 2 Select a submenu of Compare Project Parameters from the shortcut displayed.

04 (2008-12-10)

Select Last Closed from the shortcut displayed, which proceeds to compare the project
parameters with the last closed project parameters.
Select Last Imported from the shortcut displayed, which proceeds to compare the
project parameter with the last imported project parameters.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-29

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The result of comparing project parameters in an .xls file is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-31.
Figure 5-31 Result of comparing project parameters

Table 5-5 describes the result of comparing project parameters


Table 5-5 Description of the result of comparing project parameters
Sheet

Description

Project Parameters

The system compares the current project parameters with the last
closed or last imported parameters
Figure 5-32 shows the Project Parameters sheet, consists of the
record of adding, deleting, and modifying the project parameters.

Neighbor Record

The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell


relation with the last closed or the last imported one.
Figure 5-3 shows the Neighbor Record sheet, consists of the
records of adding, deleting, and modifying the configuration
neighboring cell relation.

Autoplan Neighbor
Record

The system compares the current configuration neighboring cell


relation with the last generated planned neighboring cell relat ion.
Figure 5-34 shows the Autoplan Neighbor sheet, consists of the
records of adding, deleting, and modifying the configuration
neighboring cell relation.

5-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-32 Project Parameters sheet

Figure 5-33 Neighbor Record sheet

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-31

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-34 Autoplan Neighbor Record sheet

----End

Backing Up Project Parameters


After the latest project parameters are imported, the system backs up the project parameter
table automatically, and backs up the project parameters in the database.

Backing Up Project Parameters-Uploading the Project Parameters


To upload the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Project Parameters.
The Backup Project Parameter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35 and Figure
5-36.

5-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-35 Backup Project Parameter dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-33

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-36 Backup Project Parameter dialog box

Step 2 Select Upload, and select an item to back up.

If Upload and to Last Item are selected, the existing backup item is selected
automatically.

Select Upload, and clear to Last Item, and select a backup item.
The backup item named unused refers to the backup that is unused. When you upload
the used backup, the used backup is automatically replaced with the previous backup.

Step 3 Enter a backup name in the Name field and the description for the backup in the Description
field.
The Name field is required and the Description field is optional.

5-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 4 Click OK.


An information box telling you that the uploading the project parameters successfully is
displayed, as shown in Figure 5-37.
Figure 5-37 Information box after you upload the project parameters

NOTE

When other users upload or download the project parameters, you are not allowed to continue this
operation, and then the system gives a prompt, which indicates that other users have locked the database.
Wait a moment and try again. You can backup 100 different project parameters by server. The progress is
the same as the synchronization of engineering data.

----End

Backing Up Project Parameters-Downloading the Project Parameters


To download the project parameters, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Backup Project Parameters.
The Backup Project Parameter dialog box displayed, as shown in Figure 5-35.
Step 2 Select Download and a used backup item.
Step 3 Click OK.
After you succeed in downloading the project parameters, an information box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 5-38.
Figure 5-38 Information box after you download the project parameters

Step 4 Click OK.


The site map is updated.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-35

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations
NOTE

When other users download the project parameters, you cannot continue this operation. The system
prompts that the database has been locked by other user. Wait a moment and try again.

----End

Restoring Project Parameters


You can cancel all changes in the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation,
and planned neighboring cell relation to resume the parameters to the status of last imported.

Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Closed to restore all
of the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and plan neighboring
cell relation to the status of last closed.

Choose Project > Undo Project Parameter Modification > Last Imported to restore
all of the project parameters, configuration neighboring cell relation, and plan
neighboring cell relation to the status of last imported.

CAUTION
You should use the function of Undo Project Parameter Modification with care. If you use
this function, all the added, deleted, and modified records imported the last time are missing.
Huawei recommends that you export and back up the latest engineering parameters and
neighboring relation.

5.2.4 Management of Performance Data


Importing the Performance Data
You can import the network performance data through the Transdata. The import mode
consists of static import and dynamical import.

The static import is also termed as manual import. You can import data based on the files
you choose.

You can dynamically import the data by triggering time point. This mode is applied on
site.

Backing Up the Data


To back up data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose System > Data Backup.

5-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The Data Backup menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-39.


Figure 5-39 Data Backup command

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-37

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 Set a path for saving the file, and then click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 3 Specify a path for storing the backup data, and then click OK.
The progress bar of data backup is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-41.
Figure 5-41 Progress bar

Step 4 After the backup, the following message dialog box is displayed, indicating that the data
backup is complete.

5-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-42 shows the message dialog box.


Figure 5-42 Data backup complete dialog box

Step 5 Click OK.


----End

Restoring the Data


To restore the data, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > Data Restore.
The data restore menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-43.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-39

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-43 Data Restore submenu

5-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 Specify a path for saving files, and then click OK.
The browse for folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-44.
Figure 5-44 Browse for Folder dialog box

The progress bar is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-45.


Figure 5-45 Progress bar

The data restore complete dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-46.
Figure 5-46 Data restore complete dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-41

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

----End

5.2.5 Checking Parameters


Checking the BSC Parameters
The parameter check is detailed as follows:

Check whether the network parameters consist with the recommended configurations

Check uni-directional neighbor


Check co-BCCH and co-BSIC cells

Check co-frequency neighbors in the site


Check the health status of the network planning data.

Import .dbf files to perform the parameter check.

To check parameters rationality for the BSC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check .
The Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47 Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog box

5-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Table 5-6 describes the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog
box.
Table 5-6 Description of the elements in the Frequency & Neighbor Config. Para. Check dialog
box
Item

Description

Path

Click
to select a path for saving the radio network
planning (RNP) report, or use the default directory.

BSC

Select or clear the BSC in BSC.


Clearing all selected PCUs is recommended. In this way, only the
BSC check report is generated.

Step 2 Click

to choose a path for saving the RNP check report.

The Browse for Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-48.
Figure 5-48 Browse for Folder dialog box

Step 3 Specify a path, and then click OK.


Step 4 Select one or more BSCs to be checked.
Step 5 Click the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-43

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-49.
Figure 5-49 BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page

Table 5-7 describes the elements on the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page.
Table 5-7 Description of the BSC-RNP parameter setting tab page
Element
Sheet setting

NebCell
count setting

5-44

Description
ARFCN utilization
check

For details, see section 11.5.5 "Checking Spectrum


Utilization Rate"

Co-BCCH Co-BSIC
(neighbors)

For details, see section.11.5.3 "Checking


Co-Channel and Co-BSIC"

Single neighbors
(network)

Check all the unidirectional neighboring cells based


on the neighboring relation

Channel check

Check whether the co-frequency exists in the


neighboring cells frequency, based on the
neighboring relation

Cells with fewer


neighbor check

Check the cells with neighbors less than the number


set in the Neighbor number field

Far neighbor check

Check the cells of which the distance between the


neighboring cells are longer than the number set in
the Neighbor distance field

Neighbor number

Enter the number of neighbors for check

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Element
Neighbor
distance
setting

Description
Neighbor distance

Enter the distance between the neighbors for check

Step 6 Set the parameters on the BSC-RNP Para Setting tab page.
Step 7 Click OK.
The parameter rationality check report of the BSC is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50 Parameter Rationality Check report in an .xls file

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-45

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Huawei Configuration Parameter Check


The check report on Huawei configuration parameters is generated in the .xls. To generate a
report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Huawei Configuration Parameter Check .
The Huawei Configuration Parameter Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-51.
Figure 5-51 Huawei RNP Check Setting

Step 2 Specify a path, and select one or more Objects to be checked in the Huawei Configuration
Parameter Check dialog box.

5-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 3 Click OK.


The report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters is created, as shown in Figure
5-52.
Figure 5-52 Report on the check of Huawei configuration parameters in an .xls file

Table 5-8 describes the four sheets of the configuration parameter check report.
Table 5-8 Description of the configuration parameter check report

04 (2008-12-10)

Sheet

Description

Cover

Displays the name of the network and the table heading of the
reports

Problem-Cell list

Displays the problem of BSC configuration parameters

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-47

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Sheet

Description

Configuration data check

Performs the following functions:

PCU parameters check

Checking and testing the configuration parameters based on


recommended values

Providing feasible suggestions

Highlighting the values that are within or exceed the


recommended values in different colors

Displays the results of PCU configuration parameters check

----End
NOTE

The check of Huawei configuration parameters is based on the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800
Network Planning Data Configuration Regulations. The recommended value and ranges are set in
common conditions. Owing to the actual condition of the DBF data of a cell, unhealthy conditions occur
despite the recommended value. Network optimization engineers should check the value based on the
checklist listed in the Huawei GSM BSS&PCU&GT800 Network Planning Data Configuration
Regulations.

5.3 User Management


This section consists of the following two parts:

Management of User Access Rights


Management of User Log

The management of user access rights refers to setting the rights for users for the Nastar and
the Transdata, while the user log management refers to users' operation on Nastar log files.

5-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.3.1 Management of User Access Rights


To set the user access rights, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > User Management.
The User Management dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-53.
Figure 5-53 User Management dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-49

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 In User List, right-click a user and choose Set User Access Rights from the shortcut menu.
The Set User Access Rights dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-54.
Figure 5-54 Set User Access Rights dialog box

Step 3 Set the rights for users, and then click OK.
----End

5.3.2 Management of User Log


To manage user logs, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > User Log.

5-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The User Log dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-55.


Figure 5-55 User Log dialog box

Step 2 In the Log Information area, right-click a log file.


Three options are available on the shortcut menu.
Table 5-9 lists the functions of these options.
Table 5-9 Options on the shortcut menu
Option

Used to

Update

Obtain the latest operation records of all login users.

Export log files

Save all the log information about the files.

Clear all log files

Clear the current log information.

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-51

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.4 Managing NEs


This function manages the geographic location of the site station, information about a cell,
and a BTS in a project.

5.4.1 Creating a Site


To create a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > New Site.
The pointer turns into a cross.
Step 2 Place the pointer on the BTS to be added in the Site View window. Click the BTS.

5-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-56.


Figure 5-56 Site Edit dialog box

Step 3 Enter a site name for the BTS and other BTS information on the Site Information tab page.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-53

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 4 Click the Cell Information tab.


The Cell Information tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-57.
Figure 5-57 Cell Information tab page

The Cells text box displays all cells of the current BS. For a new BS, the Cells list of a new
BS is initialized to be null.
Step 5 Click Add to add a new cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell.
Ensure that the TCH values are separated by commas.
Step 6 Click OK.
The BTS and its cells are created in the corresponding place of the site view window based on
the latitude and longitude.
----End

5-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.4.2 Editing a Site


To edit a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Edit Site.
Step 2 Place the pointer on the BTS to be edited in the Site View window. Click the BTS.
The Site Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-58.
Figure 5-58 Site Edit dialog box

Step 3 Edit the site and cell information. You can change the attribute of the site and cell.
You can also click Add to add a new cell or click Delete to delete the selected cell.
Step 4 Click OK to save the changes of the site and close the Site Edit dialog box, or click Apply to
save the changes. Do not close the Site Edit dialog box.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-55

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations
NOTE

If you delete all the cells in a site, the site is deleted.

5.4.3 Moving a Site


To move a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

on the toolbar and the mouse pointer becomes a hollow arrowhead.

Step 2 Drag the BTS to a desired new place.


The confirmation of drag BTS operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-59.
Figure 5-59 Dialog box of confirming drag BTS operation

Step 3 Click Yes to confirm or No to cancel the operation.


----End

5.4.4 Deleting a Site


To delete a site, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

on the toolbar and the mouse pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.

Step 2 Select a site, or press Ctrl key to select multiple sites.


The selected sites displayed as red oblique grid.
Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Site.
The confirmation of deletion operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-60.
Figure 5-60 Confirmation dialog box

5-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected sites, or click No to cancel the operation.
After the site is deleted, the neighbors are recalculated.
----End

5.4.5 Deleting a Cell


The procedure for deleting a cell is similar to that for deleting a site.
To delete a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

on the toolbar, the pointer changes to hollow arrowhead.

Step 2 Select a cell, or press the Ctrl key to select multiple cells.
The selected cells perform in red oblique grid.
Step 3 Choose Project > NE Maintenance > Delete Cell.
The confirmation of the deletion operation dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-61
shows t.
Figure 5-61 Confirmation dialog box

Step 4 Click Yes to delete the selected cells. Or click No to cancel the operation.
----End
NOTE

The BTSs and cells in this manual indicate only the operation process for the Nastar GSM . They do not
represent the actual situation in the current network.

5.4.6 Querying NE Property


Choose the NE from the net element list in the workspace.
The property of chosen NE in the right pane in the Property window is displayed, as shown
in Figure 5-62.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-57

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-62 Property window

Querying NE property function comprises the following:

5-58

Query cell information

Query BTS information


Query Huawei configuration parameter setting

Query Huawei GPRS cell parameter

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.5 Managing Map


5.5.1 Overview
GENEX Nastar GSM comprises the following maps:

Digital map

Reference grid map

Scan map

Map management works on different maps.

5.5.2 Importing a Map


A map can be imported in the following two formats:

For details about how to import a .gst map, see 5.1.2 "Creating a Project".

To import a .dat map, perform the following steps:

Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Import Image Layer.


The Open Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-63.
Figure 5-63 Open Raster Image dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-59

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 Select an image, and then click Open.


The Raster Image dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-64.
Figure 5-64 Raster Image dialog box

5-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 3 Click the map browser area to select the coordination location (longitude and latitude).
The Click Image to add a point dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-65.
Figure 5-65 Click Image to add a point dialog box

Step 4 Type a label name in Label, and type longitude and latitude values in the Longitude and
Latitude fields.
The Pixel X and Pixel Y are calculated by the system based on the map location. You need not
type the values manually.
Step 5 Repeat Step 2 and Step 3 to edit at least three points that are not located in a line.
If you edit more points, the precision is much higher.
Step 6 Click OK to close the Raster Image dialog box.
The raster image layer is displayed on the map window.
----End

5.5.3 General Operation of a Map


The map is displayed in the site view window. You can use the toolbar button or right-click
menu to perform with map.
Figure 5-66 shows the site view toolbar.
Figure 5-66 Site view toolbar

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-61

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Table 5-10 describes each item on the site view toolbar.


Table 5-10 Description of the site view toolbar
Item

Description
Click the button, and the pointer changes to icon shape.
Click the view and you can move the map by moving the mouse.
Click the button, and the mouse cursor change its shape to

Click the view and place the selected map in the middle.
Click the button, and the pointer becomes a common cursor. When you
choose an NE, there is a color indicated in the map and related information
displayed in the property window.
Click the button to select a range in rectangle from the map.
Click the button to select a range in circle from the map.
Click the button and the mouse cursor changes to an icon shape. Click the
view to zoom in the map.
Click the button and the mouse cursor changes to an icon shape. Click the
view to zoom out the map.
Click the button and the map returns to the original state.
Click the button, and then click the map. The distance between two points
and the total distance will be counted automatically.
Click the button, and then click the map. The angle will be measured
automatically.
Click the button and start the map layer control function.
Click the button and start the import image layer function.

5-62

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.5.4 Managing Map Layers


This function is performed to set layers. Click

The Layer Control dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-67.


Figure 5-67 Layer Control dialog box

The map layer management includes the following operations:

Choose a map layer, for example, User Draw, and then use Up or Down to adjust the
location.

Use Add to add existing layers.

Set Visible, Selectable, Automatic Labels, and Editable items for the chose layer.
Set the Display and Labels.

5.5.5 Managing the Legend


Based on the information about the current map window and operation status, the Legend
window displays relevant prompt messages.
Choose View > Display Legend Window, or click
Legend window.

on the toolbar to display or hide the

The Legend window shows different functions.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-63

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

When a location area is displayed on the system for network optimization analysis, the
Legend window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-68.
Figure 5-68 Legend window for network optimization analysis

The Legend window during adjacent channel checking is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-69.
Figure 5-69 Legend window during adjacent channel checking

NOTE

In most situations, choose View > Display Legend Window, or click


on the toolbar to display or
hide the Legend window. The content of the Legend window changes based on the operation status.
You can also view or hide the reference grid, task window, navigator window, or cell content by
choosing relevant menus or clicking relevant buttons on the toolbar.

5-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.6 Setting the Analysis Conditions


5.6.1 Setting the Time Range
Before the generation of an analysis report, you need to set the time range. The setting of the
time range is detailed as follows:

Set data range


The data range usually comprises the Begin Time, End Time, and Statistic Cycle. The
default value is the time of the current system. You can select the analysis time range.

Set busy time


Busy time comprises All day, Busy time, and Other.

If you choose All day, the system exports an analysis report of the whole day.

Choose the Busy time option, and the system exports an analysis report of the busy
time. You can modify the time, and set three busy time intervals.

Choose Other option, and the system exports analysis report of the other time. The
other time can be set by the user.

5.6.2 Setting the Save Path


You should set the save path for the generation report function.
To set the save path, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

in the prompt dialog box to choose the save path.

The Browse For Folder dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-70.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-65

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-70 Browse For Folder

Step 2 Select the save path in the dialog box.


Step 3 Click OK.
----End

5.6.3 Setting Cell Groups


The cell group setting helps you to query the data in a more convenient way. You can define a
cell group by selecting a set of very important cells (VICs), or by selecting cells in an area as
the statistic objects. You can select all of the cells or some of the cells to be queried, or select
cells from different groups to be queried.

Creating a Cell Group


To create a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group
Setting.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-71

5-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-71 Cell Group dialog box

Step 2 Click New.


The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-72.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-67

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-72 New Cell Group dialog box

Step 3 Type a name in the Cell Group Name in the New Cell Group dialog box.
Step 4 Select the cells from the Cell Group Name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments.
This step is optional.
Step 6 Select the Save as area check box.
By default, the checkbox is not selected.
If you create an area, you need to assure that any one cell belongs to one area.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End
NOTE

You can perform fuzzy search to find the added cell by using key word.

5-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Modifying a Cell Group


To modify a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group
Setting.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-73.
Figure 5-73 Cell Group dialog box

Step 2 Select a cell group from the Defined Cell Group list.
Step 3 Click Modify.
The Edit Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-74.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-69

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-74 Edit Cell Group dialog box

Step 4 Select or clear the cells in the Cell Group Name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of Cell group Comments.
Step 6 Select Save as area again.
Step 7 Click OK.
----End

5-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Deleting a Cell Group


To delete a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group
Setting.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-75.
Figure 5-75 Cell Group dialog box

Step 2 Select a cell group in the Defined Cell Group list.


Step 3 Click Delete.
The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation.
Step 4 Click OK.
The selected cell group is deleted from the Defined Cell Group list.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-71

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Export a Cell Group


To export a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group
Setting.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-76.
Figure 5-76 Cell Group

Step 2 Select a cell group which need exported from the Defined Cell Group list.
Step 3 Click Export, and then displayed the Save file dialog box.
Step 4 Click Save to export cell group.
----End

5-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Import a Cell Group


To import a cell group, perform the following steps:
Double-click Cell Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page. Alternatively, you can choose Analysis Reports > Analysis Setting > Cell Group
Setting.
The Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-77.
Figure 5-77 Cell group

Step 2 Click Import.


The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-78.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-73

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-78 Open

Step 3 Choose cell group information, and then click Open.


The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-79
Figure 5-79 Select table

Step 4 Choose a sheet, and then click OK.


The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-80.

5-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-80 Import Setting

Step 5 Set the imported data.


The system automatically identifies and matches some fields based on the table of cell group
information. For the unmatched or wrongly matched items, click the first column in the dialog
box, and select the associated field from the shortcut menu.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-75

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The Import Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-81.


Figure 5-81 Import Setting

Step 6 Click OK.


If there are cell group repeated, the prompt dialog is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-82.
Figure 5-82 Cell group repeated

Step 7 Select the mode repeating cell group.

5-76

If Overlap the cell group is selected, the cell group in server is overlapped by the
imported cell with the same name cell replace.

If Ignore the cell group is selected, the cell group information does not import.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

If you choose the default, the imported cell group selects the same mode.
Step 8 Click OK.
The displayed informed dialog box, list the cell groups imported in file, cell groups imported
successfully, incompletely and imported failure, as shown in Figure 5-83.
Figure 5-83 Import information

Step 9 Click Yes, and then the Excel file opened, as shown in Figure 5-84.
Figure 5-84 Importing cell group files

The description of Excel file displayed:

No color romance for information imported normally

Romance with yellow for cell groups imported incompletely, and the red for the cell
groups not imported

Romance with red for the cell groups imported failure

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-77

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

5.6.4 Setting the Common Period


When you execute a performance measurement task and try to obtain the daily report, you do
not need to set the query time that can be directly retrieved from the common period setting
after the common period is set. Click Get from Database to retrieve the begin date and end
date of all the performance statistics in the database.
To set common period, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Common Period Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The Common Period Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-85.
Figure 5-85 Common Period Setting dialog box

Step 2 Set Begin date and End date.


Step 3 Click OK.
----End

5.6.5 Setting Up the Synchronization Mode


If a project is in online mode, you can import data from local cells and create a mapping
relationship between local cells and server cells.
Creating a mapping relationship means mapping the cell data of a project to the cells on the
server side. The server synchronization mode also creates a mapping between the engineering
parameters imported into a project and the configuration data and performance data imported
in the database.
With the result of the traffic analysis shown on the map and engineering parameters, the result
of the traffic analysis is displayed on the site view.

5-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

To create a mapping relationship between local cells and server cells, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Double-click Synch Mode Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
The Data Synchronization Mode dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-86.
Figure 5-86 Data Synchronization Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select a mapping criterion in the field of Mapping criteria. The mapping criteria is as
follows:

Cell name

LAC+CI

Step 3 Click OK.


After the mapping, a Synchronization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-87.
Figure 5-87 Synchronization Report dialog box

Step 4 Click Ok.


The system prompts you to check the mapping result.
Step 5 Click Output result to export the synchronization report in an .xls file.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-79

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations
NOTE

If the engineering parameters in a project are not changed, you only need to implement the
synchronization once. If the engineering parameters are changed or re-imported, you need to
synchronize server data.

CAUTION
Whether the engineering parameters are not imported and the synchronization is not
implemented, does not affect the traffic result analysis.

5.6.6 Setting BSC Groups


The BSC group setting helps you to query the data in a more convenient way. You can define
a BSC group by selecting a set of BSCs. You can select all of the BSCs or some of the BSCs
to be queried, or select BSCs from different groups to be queried.

Creating a BSC Group


To create a BSC group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node in the Trouble Shooting
pane.
Figure 5-88 shows the BSC group dialog box.
Figure 5-88 BSC Group dialog box

5-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 Click New.


Figure 5-89 shows the New BSC Group dialog box.
Figure 5-89 New BSC Group dialog box

Step 3 Type a name in the BSC group name in the New BSC Group dialog box.
Step 4 Select the BSCs from the BSC group name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of BSC group Description.
This step is optional.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-81

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Modifying a BSC Group


To modify a BSC group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
Figure 5-90 shows the BSC Group dialog box.
Figure 5-90 BSC Group dialog box

Step 2 Select a BSC group from the Defined BSC Group list.
Step 3 Click Modify.
Figure 5-91 shows the BSC Group Edit dialog box.

5-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-91 BSC Group Edit dialog box

Step 4 Select or deselect the BSCs in the BSC group name list.
Step 5 Give descriptions in the area of BSC Group Description.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End

Deleting a BSC Group


To delete a BSC group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC Group Setting of the Analysis Setting node on the Trouble Shooting
page.
Figure 5-92 shows the BSC Group dialog box.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-83

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-92 BSC Group dialog box

Step 2 Select a BSC group in the Defined BSC group list.


Step 3 Click Delete.
The system prompts you to confirm the deletion operation, as shown in Figure 5-93.
Figure 5-93 Delete BSC group

Step 4 Click OK.


The selected BSC group is deleted from the Defined BSC Group list.
----End

5.7 Processing the Analysis Result


After the task is executed, you can query, collect, and calculate the statistics according to the
indicators that are customized previously. The query result is displayed in the table window.
Generally, the query result consists of the following parts:

5-84

The first part lists common information, such as time, BSC, regions, area attributes, and
cell names.

The second part lists key indicators, such as values of various indicators collected after
the query, statistics, or computation.

The last part lists the cell identity (ID). The cell ID is only an internal indicator for each
cell in the system. That is, the cell ID is not important for users. The cell ID, however,
plays an important role in the system. For example, the cell ID is required for functions,
such as automatic related display of site views and quick query of performance data.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

After traffic statistic query, the following operations are available:

Instant drawing

Exporting the query result in an .xls file


Quick query of traffic statistic

Printing query result

Controlling query result data (copy, paste and cut)

Summing up the selected area

Sorting result

Filtering data

You should set the display control based on the result except exporting to an .xls file, hiding
columns, and showing columns. The contents will be described in the following sections.

5.7.1 Operating the Analysis Table


Quick Drawing
Besides defining the draw setting during the pre-setting of a task, you can also use the quick
drawing function after the query of the result, and display the legend for the query result.
To set the quick drawing, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select Quick Draw Setting from the shortcut menu.
The Quick Draw Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-94.
Figure 5-94 Quick Draw Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select X-axis, Y1 axis, and Y2 axis columns on the Quick Draw Setting dialog box.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-85

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 3 Click Draw to start the quick drawing.


The quick drawing result is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-95.
Figure 5-95 Quick drawing

NOTE

During the quick drawing, Huawei recommends that you select multiple indicators of a cell in a
distributed period. This method is effective. If the Y-axis values of different indicators are of great
discrepancy, Huawei recommends that you select both Y1 axis and Y2 axis.

----End

Exporting the Query Results to an .xls File


Click

5-86

on the toolbar to export the query result in an .xls file.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Printing the Query Results


If there is a printer available, you can print all of the query results.
To print the query results, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

to export data to an .xls file.

Step 2 Open the .xls file to print the results.


----End

Controlling the Query Result Data


Controlling query result data involves the following operations :

Coping data

Pasting data

Cutting data

You can copy, paste, and cut data in the result sheet. These operations are similar to those in
the Microsoft Windows.

Summing Up the Selected Area


We can sum up the result of a row or a column. Firstly, select an area to be summed up, and
then click
. The system automatically sums up values of the selected area. For example,
the sum of the counter for TCH overflow (including switching) can be found in line 262, as
shown in Figure 5-96.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-87

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-96 Sum of a selected row

Sorting the Results


By default, the task query result is ranged by the column header of the common information.
The common information includes the following fields:

Vendor

BSC

Regions

Terrain attributes

Cell names
Time

To sort the query results, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Select an area that requires the sum.
Step 2 Click

or

to re-sort the query result.

Step 3 Click common information, for example, TCH Call Drop Rates.
The query result is resorted by TCH Call Drop Rates, as shown in Figure 5-97.

5-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-97 Result sorting

----End

Filtering the Query Results


You can filter the query results to display the data that you are concerned with. This function
is helpful when there are huge amounts of query data.
To filter the query results, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Click

The shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-98.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-89

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-98 Filtering query results

Step 2 Click the arrow of the drop-down list to select or deselect the items from the drop-down list.
Step 3 Click

again to exit the filter.

The system shows all of the data.


----End

5-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Tiling the Window


You can tile the window in a horizontal style or in a vertical style to facilitate your viewing
and comparison.

Select Tile Horizontal on the shortcut menu to tile the current window horizontally, as
shown in Figure 5-99.
Select Tile Vertical on the shortcut menu to tile the current window vertically.

Figure 5-99 Stretching window

Creating a Cell Group


To create a cell group, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a row or multiple rows in the table and right-click on the selected area.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-91

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Step 2 Choose New Cell Group from the shortcut menu of the selected rows, as shown in Figure
5-100.
Figure 5-100 New Cell Group on the shortcut menu

A cell group is displayed. The selected rows are added to the new cell group.
----End

Setting the Geographical Display for Performance Data


This task is performed to set display intervals and related colors to be displayed on the map.
For example, if the data is at an interval, the related cell on the map is colorized when this
function is implemented.
This template lists the specified indicators of a specified cell in a period in an ascending or
descending order. This template facilitates your review of the TopN cells with a specified
indicator.

5-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Take the cell KPI weekly trend task as an example. To set the geographical display for traffic
statistic, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click Draw Selected Column on Map on a column heading in the result report, as
shown in Figure 5-101.
Figure 5-101 Draw Selected Column on Map option

The Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
5-102.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-93

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-102 Telephone Statistic Map Color Setting dialog box

Step 2 In the area of Color Setting, select Automatically or Manually.

If you select Automatically, set Start color and End color.

If you select Manually, set color for each interval by double-clicking the color unit in
the grid.

Step 3 Click Add or Delete to add or remove ranges in the Range setting list. Alternatively select a
value in the Set range number to set the range number.
You can give description of each range in the description area of the grid. If you leave it blank,
the system automatically gives descriptions according to the value of each range.
Step 4 In the Set Min and Max group, select the options according to your requirements.

If you select Manually, set minimum and maximum values for each grid.

If you select Obtain automatically, the system gets the minimum and maximum values
from the OWC report sheet.

If you select customize, you need to enter only the minimum and maximum values.

Step 5 Select the range type in the area of Range type and select the sort type in the area of Sort
type.
Step 6 Click OK.
The result on the map is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-103.

5-94

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-103 Geographical display of performance data

----End
NOTE

When executing this operation in the query result, you may find that the data of a cell is more than
previous one. The Having same cell data row message box is also displayed.

5.7.2 Operating the Analysis Chart


Draw an analysis chart quickly. For details about the quick chart, see section 5.7.1 "Operating
the Analysis Table."
The quick chart is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-104.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-95

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Figure 5-104 Quick drawing

You can process the chart with some basic or three-dimensional operation, through the toolbar
or by right-clicking the chart.

5-96

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The toolbar can perform the rotate, move, zoom out, display the chart in-depth, display
three-dimensional chart and so on, each function as shown in Table 5-11.

Figure 5-11 describes the items on the toolbar.


Table 5-11 Icons on the toolbar
Icon

Description
Move the curve in the chart
Rotate the chart
Move the chart
Zoom in or out the chart
Display the chart in-depth
Display three-dimensional (3D) chart
Edit the chart
Print the chart
Copy the chart
Save the chart

NOTE

To zoom in or out the chart, first select


, then move up the mouse to zoom out the chart or move
down the mouse to zoom in the chart by pressing the mouse.
The default format of saving a chart is to save the chart is TeeChart Pro files (.tee), you can save chart
in multiple formats.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-97

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

The shortcut menu can realize the function of printing, displaying, and background color
setting. Right-click menu in the site view, the menu is shown in Figure 5-105.

Figure 5-105 Chart analysis menu

5-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

5 Co mmon Operations

Table 5-12 describes the function of each item in the analysis chart.
Table 5-12 Function of each item in the analysis chart
Item

Description

Show index item

Show all the query index items by default. The tick in front of the
item means the curve is displayed, you can choose the curve list or
not

Undo zoom

Undo zooming in or out

Preview

Show preview

Print

Print the chart, the same as

on the toolbar

Active Display

Display the dynamic chart

Show mark

The mark is not displayed by default. The tick in front of the item
means the mark is displayed, you can choose the mark list or not

Show legend

Show the legend by default. The tick in front of the item means the
legend is displayed Default showing the legend, you can choose
the legend list or not

Gradient color

Set the background color.

Gradient direction

Set the different background direction

Legend position

Legend position is on the bottom of the chart by default. You can


set the legend position on the top, bottom, left or right of the chart.

NOTE

Gradient direction comprises seven different gradient modes, click Gradient Direction, and it will show
different gradient direction.
The legend selects all the index items (user can define the index item) by default, as shown in Figure
5-106.You can select the legend by right-click menu or legend dialog box.

Figure 5-106 Legend

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-99

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Optimizing the Network

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Section

Describes

6.1 Introduction

Introduction to network optimization

6.2 Geographic Display

Introduction to the various geographic display

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

6.1 Introduction
To enable you to perform further analysis on the current site view, the system provides the
function of network optimization.
Geographic display realizes the analysis and query for current network system.

6.2 Geographic Display


6.2.1 Background
The geographic display function of the Nastar GSM system facilitates further analysis and
query to a great extent.

Search current cell through different methods.


Display the related information of network.

Modify the display setting.

6.2.2 Searching a Cell


You can search a cell through the following two methods:

searching a cell through the menu of the system

searching a cell through NE list

Searching a Cell through the Menu of the System


To search a cell through the menu of the system, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Search Cells.

6-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

The Search Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-1.


Figure 6-1 Search Cells dialog box

Step 2 Select the search mode.

Select Search by Name to search a cell with the keyword of the cell name. You need to
type only a keyword of the cell name in Keyword to start fuzzy search.

Select Search by CI to search the cell by cell identity. You need to type only the cell
identity of the cell to start exact search.

Step 3 Enter the keyword of a cell or the cell identity in Keyword.


The Search Result list shows the information of the search result, Cell name, CI, Site and
Site Type.
Step 4 Click an item in the Search Result list.
The relevant cell is displayed in the center of the Site View window and all the properties of
the cell are shown in the Property pane on the right side.
The system supports real-time co-activated display of the cell lists, Site View window, and
Property pane.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Searching a Cell through NE List


Search a cell through the NE list, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the NE list window on the workspace, click

The search a cell dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-2.


Figure 6-2 searching a cell

Step 2 Select the search mode, the default mode is By Cell Name, that is, to search a cell by key
word. You can also search a cell by Cell CI. The Cell Identity (CI) is 16-bit cell identity.

Select By Cell Name, you need only to enter a key word of cell name, to perform fuzzy
search.

Select By Cell CI, you need to enter CI to perform precise search.

The search result displays all cells searched in NE list box.


Step 3 Click an item from the NE list box.
The related cell of the item displayed in the center of the map, and the property of the cell
displayed in property window as well.
The system supports linkage of the cell list, site view and the property page.
----End

6-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

6.2.3 Displaying a Location Area or a Site


Displaying a Location Area
This function is to display the location area division of the current network. For a network,
dividing the location area incorrectly, for example, the boundary of the location area located
in the place with many users, or the location area divided along heavy traffic road, may cause
many problems. Such as signal traffic increasing, network resource over-occupied, frequent
switch, and switchover failure.
To display the location area, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display LAC.
The Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Location area displaying setting dialog box

Step 2 Select Range Setting.

04 (2008-12-10)

Select All Network Location Area to show all location areas.

Select Specified Location Area to show a specified location area.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Step 3 Click Color Setting.


The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Color Setting dialog box

Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and then
click OK.
Step 5 Click OK in the Location Area Displaying Setting dialog box.
It is necessary to check and adjust the partition of the location area, especially view the
partition situation of the current location area with the map information, as shown in Figure
6-5.

6-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-5 LAC displayed on the map

In the Legend pane, different colors indicate different location areas. The value before the
bracket is the LAC ID, and the value in the bracket is the number of cells in the LAC area.
From the map, you can infer that three LAC areas of EASTWOOD are embedded in LAC
11012 area. The division is not proper as regarding the network optimization. The three LAC
areas may cause the increase of signal traffic, over-frequent location altering, and handover
problems. Therefore, modifying the location area property of EASTWOOD is a must.
----End
NOTE

The edge of the location area is based on cell blocks. Therefore, the display of cell blocks is required in
this operation. If this operation does not work, choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell
Setting and select Display cell blocks.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Displaying the GPRS Cells


This function is to view the distribution of the GPRS cells in service on the network.
To display the GPRS cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display GPRS Cells.
The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-6 Color setting dialog box

Step 2 Select the color on the Color Setting dialog box.


Step 3 Click OK.
The distribution of the GPRS cells in service on the current network is displayed, as shown in
Figure 6-7.

6-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-7 GPRS cells highlighted on the map

The GPRS cells are highlighted in the selected color to distinguish from the non-GPRS cells.
----End

Displaying the BSC Coverage


This function is to view the coverage of the BSC in the current network. This function
provides references for locating the problems of network failure, and provides information for
network optimization, such as solving the problem of handover.
To display the BSC coverage, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display BSC Coverage.
The BSC Display Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-8 BSC Display Setting dialog box

Step 2 Set Range Setting.

Select Whole network to show all the BSCs in the network.

Select Specified BSC to show the selected BSC in BSC list.


BSC list is available only when Specified BSC is selected.

Step 3 Click Color Setting.


The Color Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9 Color Setting dialog box

Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to change the color of the location area, and then
click OK.
Step 5 Click OK in the BSC Display Setting dialog box
The coverage situation of the selected BSC is highlighted in the selected color, as shown in
Figure 6-10.

6-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-10 BSC Coverage highlighted on the map

----End

Displaying All Sites


Choose Geographic Display > Display All Sites to display all sites of 900 MHz and 1800
MHz on the map.
The sites of 900 MHz and 1800 MHz are displayed on the map in different colors and sizes,
as shown in Figure 6-11.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-11 All sites displayed on the map

NOTE

The function of cell block and the other functions based on the cell block are applied to a single layer.
The cell blocks are displayed inaccurately when all sites are displayed.

6.2.4 Displaying the Network Optimization Theme


Customized indexes of the project parameters are defined by users with a value. All
user-defined items of cells are classified and displayed in different colors in the site view.
To display the network optimization theme, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Network Optimization Theme Setting, as shown in
Figure 6-12.

6-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-12 Display Network Optimization Theme Setting menu

The Show Theme dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13.


Figure 6-13 Show Theme dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Table 6-1 describes the elements in the Show Theme dialog box.
Table 6-1 Elements in the show theme dialog box
Element

Description

Color Setting

Indicator Setting

Start Color

Select the start color.

End Color

Select the end color.

Indicator

Select an indicator
(USERDEF1USERDEF 10) to be colored.

Description

Enter the description of the indicator.

Range Setting
Button

Add legend description and set the lower


limit and upper limit.
Add

Click the button to add a range.

Delete

Click the button to delete the selected


range.

Step 2 Edit the elements based on the description in Table 6-1.


Step 3 Click OK to highlight the map of the network optimization theme.
The result of the highlighted theme is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14.

6-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-14 Result of the highlighted theme

The legend window displays the different ranges set by users. The first digit of the number in
a bracket refers to the number of cells at the 900 MHz layer, and the last digit means the
number of cells in the 1800 MHz layer.
----End

6.2.5 Displaying a Reference Grid


Displaying the reference grid helps to judge the distance between BTSs. The reference
distance of the reference grid is 500 meters by default.
Choose Geographic Display >Display Reference Grid, or click
display or hide the reference grid.

on the toolbar to

When the reference grid is displayed, the Site View window is shown in Figure 6-15.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-15 Reference grid

6-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

6.2.6 Switching 900/1800 Layer


For a dual-frequency network, generally, you need to switch 900/1800 MHz layer during
network optimization analysis or traffic statistic analysis.
The 900 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 900 MHz layer

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

The 1800 MHz layer is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17.


Figure 6-17 1800 MHz layer

Click the relevant cell to display the cell in the center of the map. If the cell does not exist in
the current layer, the system program automatically switches to another level. You can also
manually switch layers by choosing Geographic Display > Switch to layer 900/1800, or
clicking
on the toolbar of the map. When the map window is selected, you can also press
Ctrl+W to switch between layers quickly.
NOTE

In most cases, you can switch between layers of a dual band network by choosing Geographic
Display > S witch to layer 900/1800, or clicking
perform the preceding operations.

6-18

on the toolbar of the toolbar. Then you can

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

6.2.7 Configuring the Neighbors Switching


The function of configuring the neighbors switching can perform the switching between
configuration neighbors and plan neighbors.

Choose Geographic Display > Switch to Config. Neighbors to switch to configuration


neighbors;

Choose Geographic Display > Switch to Plan Neighbors to switch to simulated


neighbors, that is, the automatic planned neighbors.

6.2.8 Displaying Project Parameters on a Map


To render project parameters on the map, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Render Project's Parameters.
The Project Parameter Select dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-18.
Figure 6-18 Project Parameter Select dialog box

Step 2 Select a project parameter in Param List.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Step 3 Click Next.


The Color Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-19.
Figure 6-19 Color Config dialog box

Step 4 Double-click a grid in the Color column to set the colors for the selected parameter.
Step 5 Select Effect on antenna or Effect on section in Display Option.
The Effect on section option is selected by default.

6-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Step 6 Click OK to render the map.


The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.
Figure 6-20 Display on the map

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

6.2.9 Modifying Display Setting


Setting Cell Display
To set the cell show setting, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Display Setting.
The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 Show Items Option dialog box

Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field.

Site
Site Label

Antenna
Cell Label

Sector

Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field.
If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. If the
zoom value exceeds the range, the BTS antenna is not displayed. You can set the range based
on the antenna density on the map.
Step 4 Set the showing color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

6-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Setting Cell Label


To set a cell label, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Label Setting.
The Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22.
Figure 6-22 Option dialog box

Step 2 Set the cell label content in Cell Label.


Step 3 Select Detail Label to display the detailed label.
Step 4 Click Fonts to set the label in Label Option.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Step 5 Click OK to display the cell label on the map.


The result is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Result figure with the cell label

----End

6-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Setting Reference Grid


To set a reference grid, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Display Option > Reference Grid Setting.
The Grid Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-24.
Figure 6-24 Grid Setting dialog box

Step 2 Enter the grid length and select the color.


Step 3 Click OK.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Setting Configuration Parameters Display


To set configuration parameters display, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Config Parameter Display Setting.
The Config data show setting dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 Config data show setting dialog box

Step 2 Select Huawei in the Vendor area.


Step 3 Choose a data type required in the Type drop-down list.
Step 4 Add or remove the data items in the Selected Config Data list by using items in the All
Config Data list.
Step 5 Click OK.
The Huawei configuration parameters on the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab page of
the Property window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-26.

6-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-26 Property window

----End
NOTE

When the selected cells use Huawei devices, the configuration parameters of the cells are Huawei
configuration parameters. The Property window displays the Huawei config Parameter Setting tab.
If the selected cell uses equipment of other vendors, the configuration parameters of the cell must be the
configuration parameters of the corresponding manufacture. The Property window displays the
corresponding tab. A cell can be configured with only one manufacturers configuration parameters.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

6.2.10 Map Legend


Add Legend
To add legend, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Map Legend > Add Legend.
The pointer turns into a cross.
Step 2 Place the pointer on the map and Click.
The Add Map Mark dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27 Add Map Mark

Step 3 Enter a Mark Name.


Step 4 Click Add.
The Mark is added in the corresponding place on the map.
----End

Select Legend
To select legend, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display >Map Legend > Select Legend.
The Map Mark dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-28.

6-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

6 Optimizing the Net work

Figure 6-28 Map Mark

Step 2 Select a Mark in the Map Mark dialog box.


The relevant mark is displayed in the center of the Map.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

6-29

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Automatic Optimization of Neighbors

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Title

Description

7.1 verview

The automatic optimization of neighbors.

7.2 Obtaining the


Optimization Data of
Neighbor ing Cells

How to obtain the neighbor cell optimization data.

7.3 Task Analysis of


Automatic Neighbor
Optimization

The task analysis of automatic neighbor optimization.

7.4 Procedures for Automatic


Optimization of Neighbors

The procedures for automatic optimization of neighbors.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

7.1 verview
Automatic optimization of neighbors helps to sort out the defined neighboring cells,
undefined neighboring cells, redundant neighboring cells, and missing neighboring cells of
each serving cell from the M2000 measurement task files and the Nastar database. Automatic
optimization of neighbors helps to analyze the reasons for redundant and missing neighboring
cells and provides recommended operations. You can optimize a single cell or cells in batch
mode.
The application scenarios of automatic neighbor optimization are as follows:

Fine neighbor optimization


Fine neighbor optimization helps to provide professional optimization to the neighbors
of the abnormal cells.
Bulk neighbor optimization
Bulk neighbor optimization helps to solve most of the problems regarding a large
number of neighboring cells.

Table 7-1 lists the information about the database versions of the BSC and Nastar that helps to
implement automatic optimization of neighbors.
Table 7-1 Information about the database versions of the BSC and Nastar
Object

Requirement

BSC6000

V9R8C01 or a later version

Database

SQL Server 2000 Standard or Enterprise Edition


MS Access

7.2 Obtaining the Optimization Data of Neighboring Cells


The Nastar optimization data of Nastar neighboring cells is obtained from the M2000. You
can set optimization tasks for neighboring cells on the M2000 client to collect the
optimization data. The version of the iManager M2000, network element mangement software,
must be M2000 V200R007 or later versions.

7-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

7.2.1 Creating the Data Collection Task for Neighboring Cell


Optimization
The analysis data for the neighboring cell optimization is collected by the M2000. To create a
data collection task on the M2000 client, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Log in to the M2000 client. Choose Maintenance > Task Management from the menu. The
Task Management dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Task Management dialog box

Step 2 Click New.


The New Task dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-2. Enter the name of the custom
task in Task Name. Choose Other > Neighbour Cells Optimizing in the Task Type area,
and select Period in the Run Type area. Then, click Next.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-3

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 7-2 New Task dialog box

Difference between a period task and an once task: A period task is performed periodically while an
once task is performed for only once. Thus, you need to set only the execution time for an once task.
This part takes a period task as an example to describe how to set the related parameters. You can set
the parameters for an once task by referring to this part.

Step 3 In the New Task dialog box shown in Figure 7-3, set the start time of the task in the Time
Setting area and the task period and execution times in the Period Setting area. The periodic
execution times range from 0 to 65535. The value 0 indicates no limit. Click Next.

7-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Figure 7-3 Setting start time, end time, and period for the task

The start time must be later than the current time of the server.

If Run Type is set to Once, the Start Time parameter is invalid after you select Run At Once. In
addition, the task is performed immediately after the settings are complete.

Step 4 Set the related parameters in the New Task dialog box shown in Figure 7-4 by referring to the
parameters described in Table 7-2. Then, click Finish.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Figure 7-4 Setting parameters for the new task

Table 7-2 Neighbor Cell Optimization Parameter


Parameter

Description

Measure
object

NE Type

Indicates the type of an NE.

NE Name

Indicates the name of an NE.

Measure
task

Period

Indicates the interval between the measurements of


different frequency groups.
The value is an integer from 1 to 48. The unit is *15
(minute), that is, the value must be multiples of 15
minutes.
For example, if this parameter is set to 2, the measure
ment time for each frequency group should be 215
minutes, that is, 30 minutes.

Step

Indicates the number of frequencies in each group.


The value is an integer from 1 to 32.

Set Cell
Parameter

Indicates the cells selected in the data collection task.


Click Add to open the Select Cell dialog box. Select the
cells to be measured.
An NE can measure a maximum of 50 cells
simultaneous ly.

7-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Parameter

Description
Set Frequency
Parameter

Indicates the frequencies selected in the data collection


task. The frequencies are grouped. The number of
frequencies of each group is determined by Step.
Click Add to open the Select Frequency dialog box.
Select cells to be measured.
You can select a maximum of 762 frequencies for one
NE. If the number exceeds 762, the NE returns an error
message informing you of the creation or modification
failure.
Set Step before you set frequency parameter.

Soft
parameter

RSSThres

The value is an integer from 0 to 127.


When the measurement report indicates that the
difference between the level of the neighboring cell and
that of the serving cell is greater than RSSThres, the
counter for relevant traffic statistics adds 1.

ASSThres

The value is an integer from 0 to 63.


When the measurement report indicates that the level of
the neighboring cell is greater than this value, the
counter for relevant traffic statistics adds 1.

ADJINLVThres1

The value is an integer from 0 to 63.


When the measurement report indicates that the
difference between the level of the neighboring cell and
that of the serving cell is greater than this value, the
counter for relevant traffic statistics adds 1.

----End

7.2.2 Setting Measurement Counters


After creating a neighboring cell optimization task, perform the following steps to set the
measurement counters:
Step 1 Log in to the M2000 client, and choose Performance> Measure Management >
Measurement Settings from the menu.
The Measure Management dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Select Object Type in the Organization Style area and select BSC6000 or other NEs in the
Filter Search area.
Step 3 Click Measurement Settings in the Measure Management dialog box. Select
measurements related to HSUPA in the Function Set area and HSUPA measurements per
local cell in the Function Subnet area.
Step 4 Click 15 Minutes in the Measurement Counter area.
All measurement counters are selected.
Step 5 Select All NE in the All Measurement Object area and then click Apply.
04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-7

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

The system displays a dialog box indicating that the parameters are successfully set.
Step 6 Click OK.
----End

7.2.3 Obtaining Analysis Data of Neighboring Cell Optimization


After the task for optimizing the M2000 neighbor ing cell is complete, you can obtain the
neighbor ing cell optimization data from the M2000 server. The data is saved in the
opt/OMC/var/fileint/other/adjacentCell directory.

7.3 Task Analysis of Automatic Neighbor Optimization


The automatic neighbor optimization function of Nastar GSM enables you to directly import
measurement task for analysis. You can also manually set measurement tasks for analysis.

7.3.1 Importing a Measurement Task for Analysis


To import a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Neighbors.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-5.

7-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Figure 7-5 Automatic Optimization of Neighbors dialog box

Step 2 Click
on the toolbar. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 7-6, select a
measurement task file, which is in .xls format.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-9

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 7-6 Selecting a measurement task file for automatic neighboring cell optimization

Step 3 After selecting a task file, click Open.


A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-7.

7-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Figure 7-7 Information about the imported measurement task

Step 4 Click
. In the dialog box, set relevant parameters, as shown in Figure 7-8. You are
advised to retain the default settings.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-11

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 7-8 Advanced Setting dialog box

In the Advanced S etting dialog box, you are advised to retain the default settings. If you want to change
the default settings, read the tip circled in read, as shown in Figure 7-8.

Step 5 Click OK.


Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task.
Through the analysis, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-9.
Figure 7-9 Analysis result

----End

7-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

7.3.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis


To manually set a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Neighbors.
Step 2 Click

on the toolbar. A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-10.

Figure 7-10 Manually setting a measurement task

Table 7-3 describes each configuration item shown in Figure 7-10.


Table 7-3 Description of each configuration item entered for automatic neighboring cell
optimization

04 (2008-12-10)

Configuration
Item

Description

Measurement step
length

Indicates the number of frequency points added each time. The


parameter value ranges from 1 to 31.

Measurement
period

Value 1 indicates that the measurement period is 15 minutes, and


value 4 indicates that the measurement period is 60 minutes.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Configuration
Item

Description

Begin time

Indicates the time when the system starts to perform a measurement


task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes.

End time

Indicates the time when the system stops performing a measurement


task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes.
Add a cell for analysis.
Remove a cell to be analyzed.
Add all the cells for analysis.
Remove all the cells to be analyzed.

Measurement
ARFCN

You can manually enter the frequency points to be measured. Separate


two different frequency points by using a comma in DBC case.

The Measurement ARFCN field can be null.

The cells to be analyzed must belong to the same BSC.

Step 3 Click OK. A manual measurement task is successfully created, as shown in Figure 7-11.
Figure 7-11 Task information about the manually entered measurement task

7-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Step 4 Click
. In the Advanced Setting dialog box, set relevant parameters, as described in
section 7.3.1 Step 4. You are advised to retain the default settings.
Step 5 In the dialog box shown in Figure 7-11, click OK.
Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task.
Through the analysis, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-9.
----End

7.4 Procedures for Automatic Optimization of Neighbors


Automatic optimization of neighbors provides two optimization modes: manual optimization
and automatic bulk optimization. It supports the export of the optimization script and the
display of result on a map.

7.4.1 Manual Optimization


To manually optimize Nastar GSM neighboring cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a cell to be analyzed. The system automatically displays the defined neighbors and
undefined neighbors of the selected cell and provides recommended operations.
Figure 7-12 shows defined neighbors and undefined neighbors.
Figure 7-12 Defined neighbors and undefined neighbors

Step 2 Select a proper defined neighbor, and right-click it.


A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-13.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-15

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 7-13 Selecting a defined neighbor

Step 3 From the shortcut menu, choose Delete Redundant Neighbor.


Figure 7-14 shows the operation result.
Figure 7-14 Operation result

Step 4 Select a proper undefined neighbor, and right-click it.


A shortcut menu is displayed, as shown in Figure 7-15.

7-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Figure 7-15 Selecting an undefined neighbor

Step 5 From the shortcut menu, choose Add Missing Neighbor.


Figure 7-16 shows the operation result.
Figure 7-16 Operation result

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-17

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7.4.2 Other Operations

Automatic optimization of bulk neighbors


Click
. The system automatically optimizes the specified neighbors in batch mode, as
shown in Figure 7-17.

Figure 7-17 Result of bulk optimization

Exporting the optimization script


Click
7-18.

. The system exports the optimization result to a sheet, as shown in Figure

Figure 7-18 Exporting optimization data of neighbors

7-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

7 Automat ic Optimization of Neighbors

Display of optimization legends


Click
. The system identifies neighboring relations by using different colors on the
topology view, as shown in Figure 7-19.

Figure 7-19 Legends of automatic optimization of neighbors

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

7-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

Automatic Optimization of Frequency

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Title

Description

8.1 Overview

The automatic optimization of frequency.

8.2 Task Analysis of


Automatic Frequency
Optimization

The import and analysis of measurement tasks.

8.3 Exporting the Result of


Automatic Frequency
Optimization

The export of the result generated for automatic


optimization of frequency.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

8.1 Overview
Automatic optimization of frequency is based on the analysis of traffic statistics. The principle
for automatic optimization of frequency is as follows: The system automatically modifies the
BA table of a cell and sends the BA table to an MS in the form of a message. Then, according
to the BA table, the MS performs neighbor measurement and reports the measurement result.
By checking the measurement result of the corresponding frequency in the measurement
result, the system determines whether the cell mapping to the frequency is an undefined
neighbor.
Table 8-1 lists the versions of the BSC and the M2000 that are related to the implementation
of automatic optimization of frequency.
Table 8-1 Versions of the BSC and the M2000
Object

Requirement

BSC6000

V9R8C01 or a later version

M2000

V2R6C01 or a later version

8.2 Task Analysis of Automatic Frequency Optimization


The automatic frequency optimization of Nastar GSM enables you to directly import
measurement tasks for analysis. You can also manually set measurement tasks for analysis.

8.2.1 Importing a Measurement Task for Analysis


To import a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Frequency.
A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-1.

8-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

Figure 8-1 Automatic Optimization of Frequency dialog box

Step 2 Click
on the toolbar. In the displayed dialog box shown in Figure 8-2, select a
measurement task file, which is in .xls format.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-3

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 8-2 Selecting a measurement task for automatic frequency optimization

Step 3 After selecting a task file, click Open.


A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-3.

8-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

Figure 8-3 Task information

Step 4 Click
. In the Advanced Setting dialog box, set relevant parameters. You are advised
to retain the default settings.
Figure 8-4 Advanced Setting dialog box

Step 5 Click OK.


Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-5

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Through analysis and calculation, the system displays a dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-5 Result of automatic frequency optimization

----End

8.2.2 Manually Setting a Measurement Task for Analysis


To manually set a measurement task for analysis, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Automatic Optimization of Frequency.
The Automatic Optimization of Frequency dialog box is displayed.
Step 2 Click

on the toolbar.

A dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 8-6.

8-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

Figure 8-6 Manual Task dialog box

Table 8-2 describes each configuration item shown in Figure 8-6.


Table 8-2 Parameter description of each configuration item
Configuration
Item

Description

Measurement step
length

Indicates the number of frequency points added each time. The


parameter value ranges from 1 to 31.

Measurement
period

Value 1 indicates that the measurement period is 15 minutes, and


value 4 indicates that the measurement period is 60 minutes.

Begin time

Indicates the time when the system starts to perform a measurement


task. The parameter value must be a multip le of 15 minutes.

End time

Indicates the time when the system stops performing a measurement


task. The parameter value must be a multiple of 15 minutes.
Add a cell for analysis.
Remove a cell to be analyzed.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

Configuration
Item

Description
Add all the cells for analysis.
Remove all the cells to be analyzed.

Measurement
ARFCN

You can manually enter the frequency points to be measured. Separate


two different frequency points by using a comma.

The Measurement ARFCN field can be null.

The cells to be analyzed must belong to the same BSC.

Step 3 Click OK. A manual measurement task is successfully created, as shown in Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-7 Task information

Step 4 Click
. In the Advanced Setting dialog box, set relevant parameters. You are advised
to retain the default settings. Click OK.
Step 5 Click OK.
Then, the Nastar GSM starts analyzing the measurement task.
Through analysis and calculation, the system displays a dialog box, as shown in Figure 8-5.
----End

8-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

8 Automat ic Optimization of Frequency

8.3 Exporting the Result of Automatic Frequency


Optimization
Click

. The system exports the optimization result to a sheet, as shown in Figure 8-8.

Figure 8-8 Exporting the result of automatic frequency optimization

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

8-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Network Performance Alarms

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Title

Description

9.1 Introduction

Introduction to the network performance alarms.

9.2 Types of Performance


Alarm

Introduction to the type of the performance alarm.

9.3 Operations About Network


Performance Alarms

How to start, suspend, activate, query, handle, create,


delete, modify, filter the alarm tasks, and the query of the
history alarm tasks.

9.4 Setting the Performance


Alarms

How to set the performance alarms.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.1 Introduction
The network performance alarms provide the reports of performance alarms of the entire
network devices in quasi real time. You can set and filter the conditions for performance alarm
report as required of engineers.
According to the alarms, the network maintenance personnel can import maintenance
information and handle advice. The related information can be saved and queried. By
querying the history performance alarms, you can obtain the details about the history
performance alarms.

9-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 9-1 shows the network performance alarms.


Figure 9-1 Performance Alarm navigation tree

9.2 Types of Performance Alarm


The performance alarms can be categorized into the following types:

04 (2008-12-10)

Standard Alarm
Optional Alarm

Customizing an Alarm

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.2.1 Standard Alarm


Alarm Caused by Carrier Disabled Cell
To set the condition of the carrier disabled cell, perform as following steps:
Step 1 Right-click the TRX Cell Alarm under the Standard Alarm node on the Performance
Alarm pane, as shown in Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-2 Modify alarm task

Step 2 Choose Modify Alarm Task(M) from the shortcut menu displayed.
A dialog box of Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting is displayed,
as shown in Figure 9-3.

9-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 9-3 Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box

Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting(K), a dialog box of Alarm Condition Setting is displayed,
as shown in Figure 9-4.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 9-4 Alarm condition setting

Step 4 Select a KPI name from the KPI Name drop-down list, take the TCH Usability as example,
the default value is less then 100 percents.
For details about the Compare Operation Symbol, Alarm Value and Logic Operation
Symbol setting, see Table 9-1.
Table 9-1 Alarm condition setting symbol

9-6

Condition

symbol

Compare operation symbol

>, >=, =, <, <=, <>

Alarm value

Input the float value

Logic operation symbol

AND, OR

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Step 5 Click Modify(M), and then the modified alarm condition setting displayed in the Alarm
Condition group box of the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box, as shown in Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5 Alarm condition setting modified

----End

Dormancy Cell Alarm


When the TCH traffic volume per channel is 0 (Erl), the dormancy cell alarm is generated.
Figure 9-6 shows the Carrier Frequency Disabled Cell Alarm Parameter Setting dialog
box.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Figure 9-6 Carrier frequency disabled cell alarm parameter setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can modify the conditions according to actual requirements.

9-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.2.2 Optional Alarm


High Call Traffic Volume Cell Alarm
When the TCH traffic volume per channel is equal to or greater than 0.6 (Erl), the alarm of
high-volume traffic cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual
requirements, as shown in Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-7 Alarm condition setting dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Low Call Traffic Volume Cell Alarm


When the TCH traffic volume per channel is less than 0.01 (Erl), the alarm of low-volume
traffic cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements,
as shown in Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-8 Alarm condition setting dialog box

9-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

TCH Congestion Cell Alarm


When the TCH congestion rate (including handovers) is greater than or equal to 10%, the
alarm of TCH congestion cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the
actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9 Alarm condition setting dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

SDCCH Congestion Cell Alarm


When the stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH) congestion rate is equal to or
greater than 10%, the alarm of SDCCH congestion cell is generated. You can modify the
conditions according to the actual requirements, as shown in Figure 9-10.
Figure 9-10 Alarm of SDCCH Congestion Cell

9-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

TCH Call Drop Cell Alarm


When the TCH call drop rate (including handovers) is equal to or greater than 8%, the alarm
of TCH call drop cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual
requirements, as shown in Figure 9-11.
Figure 9-11 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

SDCCH Call Drop Cell Alarm


When SDCCH call drop rate is equal to or greater than 10%, the alarm of the SDCCH call
drop cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual requirements, as
shown in Figure 9-12.
Figure 9-12 Alarm of SDCCH call drop cell

9-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Successful Call Setup Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm


When the immediate assignment success rate is less than 90%, the alarm of immediate
assignment success cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to the actual
requirements, as shown in Figure 9-13.
Figure 9-13 Alarm of immediate assignment success cell

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Radio Connected Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm


When the radio connected rate (including handovers) is equal to or less than 90%, the alarm
of radio connected cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to actual
requirements, as shown in Figure 9-14.
Figure 9-14 Alarm of radio connected cell

9-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Successful Handover Rate Over Threshold Cell Alarm


When the successful handovers is equal to or less than 90%, the alarm of successful handover
cell is generated. You can modify the conditions according to actual requirements, as shown in
Figure 9-15.
Figure 9-15 Alarm of successful handover cell

9.2.3 Customizing an Alarm


You can also customize alarm tasks.
For details about how to customize an alarm, see section 9.3.4 "Creating an Alarm Task."

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3 Operations About Network Performance Alarms


9.3.1 Starting, Suspending, or Activating Alarm Tasks
Starting an Alarm Task
When the system is started, the default status of performance alarms is enabled. You can
manually enable or disable alarms.
To execute an alarm task, choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Setting > Alarm
Filtering Setting. The icon
before the menu describes the success of starting the alarm
task, as shown in Figure 9-16.
Figure 9-16 Starting an alarm task

9-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Suspending an Alarm Task


Suspending a running alarm task refers to stopping the progress of this alarm task.
To suspend an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.
Step 2 Choose Disabled from the shortcut menu, the Performance Alarm navigation tree is
displayed, as shown in Figure 9-17.
Figure 9-17 Suspending an Alarm Task

----End

Activating an Alarm Task


Activating an alarm task refers to executing this alarm task.
To activate an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, right-click Dormancy Cell Alarm.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Step 2 Choose Enabled from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-18.
Figure 9-18 Activating an alarm task

----End

9-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.2 Checking Alarm Tasks


To check an alarm task, double-click the alarm task in the Performance Alarm navigation
tree to view the detailed information about this task, as shown in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Performance Alarm navigation tree

Table 9-2 lists the checking methods, status, and results of each alarm message.
Table 9-2 Checking alarm messages

04 (2008-12-10)

To

You can

Result

Check
whether an
alarm
message is
generated,

Check the color of the cell


icon in front of the alarm
name.

Green: indicates that there is no alarm.

Red: indicates the alarms are generated


and are followed by the number of the
alarms.

Check the
location of
the
problematic
cell,

Click the alarm cell row in


the lower right corner of
the Alarm Message dialog
box.

On the map, the located area turns red.

Check the
detailed
information
about an
alarm task,

Double-click the alarm cell


row in the Alarm Message
dialog box of the lower
right corner.

The Warn Operation dialog box that


contains the detailed information about an
alarm task is displayed, as shown in Figure
9-20.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.3 Alarm Task Process


To perform the alarm task process, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click the row where the alarm is generated in the Alarm Message dialog box.
Figure 9-20 Alarm Operation dialog box

9-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Step 2 Select an alarm task.


You can enter the information in the Operation Person, Operation Procedure, Operation,
and Demo fields, as shown in Figure 9-21.
Figure 9-21 Filling in detailed information about the alarm task

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.4 Creating an Alarm Task


To create an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Right-click in the Performance Alarm navigation tree, the shortcut menu is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-22.
Figure 9-22 Creating an alarm task

Step 2 Choose New Alarm Task from the shortcut menu, the Alarm Template is displayed, as
shown in Figure 9-23.
Figure 9-23 Alarm Template navigation tree

Step 3 In the Alarm Template navigation tree, select an alarm template, and then click Select.

9-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

You can also double-click the selected alarm template, the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog
box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-24.
Figure 9-24 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box

In this dialog box, you can set the following parameters:

04 (2008-12-10)

Task name

Time period

Alarm circle

Task state

Start time

Alarm cells

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Step 4 In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, click Alarm Condition Setting (K).
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-25.
Figure 9-25 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

In the Alarm Condition Setting group box, you can add a maximum of three alarm
conditions.
Step 5 After setting the parameters for an alarm, click OK.
An alarm task is created and it is added to the Custom Alarm node in the Performance
Alarm navigation tree.
----End

9-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.5 Deleting an Alarm Task


To delete an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, select an alarm to be deleted.
Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and select Delete Alarm Task from the
shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-26.
Figure 9-26 Deleting an alarm task

The confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task is displayed, as shown in Figure
9-27.
Figure 9-27 Confirmation dialog box about deleting an alarm task

Step 3 Click OK.


----End

Custom alarms can be deleted. Standard and optional alarms, however, cannot be deleted.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.6 Modifying an Alarm Task


To modify an alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation pane, select an alarm to be modified.
Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and choose Modify Alarm Task from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-28.
Figure 9-28 Modifying an alarm task

The Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-29.
Figure 9-29 Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box

9-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

In the Alarm Parameter Setting dialog box, you can modify the parameters for the alarm
task.
Step 3 Click Alarm Condition Setting.
The Alarm Condition Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-30.
Figure 9-30 Alarm Condition Setting dialog box

You can modify the alarm conditions in the Alarm Condition Setting dialog box.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-29

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.7 Searching for a History Alarm Task


To search for a history alarm task, perform the following steps:
Step 1 In the Performance Alarm navigation tree, select an alarm to be searched.
Step 2 Right-click the Performance Alarm navigation tree, and choose History Alarm Query from
the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 9-28.
The History Alarm Search dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-31.
Figure 9-31 History Alarm Search dialog box

Step 3 In the History Alarm Search dialog box, set the start time and end time in the Start Time
and End Time fields.
Step 4 Search the alarm task based on the key words, such as the task name, the task operator, the
task procedure, the result, and the memo.
The checking results can be displayed in an .xls file.

9-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

The Alarm window is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-32.


Figure 9-32 Alarm window

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-31

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.3.8 Setting Filtering Conditions for Alarms


To set filtering conditions for an alarm, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Report > Performance Alarm Setting > Alarm Filtrate Setting, as shown
in Figure 9-33.
Figure 9-33 Alarm Filtrate Setting Menu

9-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

The Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-34.
Figure 9-34 Alarm KPI Filter Setting dialog box

Step 2 Select a cell to be filtered, and then select the KPI to be filtered.
Step 3 Select the KPI items (multiple options) from the KPI group box, and then click Add or
Delete.
Step 4 Click Save.
Step 5 Click OK.
The setting of the KPI filtering is complete.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-33

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

9.4 Setting the Performance Alarms


The TaskWatcher scans performance alarms. To configure the TaskWatcher, perform the
following steps:
Step 1 Double-click the Bin folder in the \Huawei GENEX\Nastar GSM directory.
Step 2 Double-click the TaskWatch.ini file.
The Notepad is displayed, as shown in Figure 9-35.
Figure 9-35 Notepad

Step 3 Modify the configuration parameters in the notepad.


Pay special attention when you modify the parameters under [transdata] and [nastar].The
information proceeded by Database= should be in accordance with the information created in
the Transdata.

9-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Table 9-3 describes fields in the notepad..


Table 9-3 Description of fields

04 (2008-12-10)

Field

Description

AlarmDormancyTimeOne

Indicates the start time of the alarm dormancy, that is,


from this time on, the alarm function is shielded. For
example, 0 indicates 00:00:00.

AlarmDormancyTimeTwo

Indicates the end time of the alarm dormancy, that is,


from this time on, the alarm function is restored. For
example, 6 indicates 06:00:00.

DayReportTemplate

Indicates the path of the template of daily reports.

DelayExecTime_minute

Indicates the time delay of the alarm, that is, the


delay of the time when the performance data of the
BAM is exported. The unit is minute. For example, the
performance data imported at 9:00 may be exported to
the BAM at 9:25. Thus, the time of the performance
alarm is bound to be delayed. Set the time delay based
on the specific situation of the actual office. The time
delay is around 30 minutes. The recommended setting
for the time delay is between 1 to 60 minutes.

MonthReportTemplate

Indicates the path of the template of monthly reports.

TaskScanCycle_minute

Indicates the scanning period for the performance


alarms. The default period is 1 minute. If you set the
scanning period longer, the impact on the performance
of the Nastar server is less. If the performance of the
server becomes worse, you can set the period to a
longer value. The recommended time period is between
1 to 25 minutes.

WarnDispCycle_minute

Indicates the period for the refreshing the alarms. The


default period is 1 minute. The longer the period is, the
more system resources are occupied. The
recommended time period is 1 to 10 minutes.

WarnThreadPRI_number

Indicates the priority for the warn thread, and the


default value is 16.The bigger the value is, the higher
priority the alarm has, that is, the smaller the value is ,
the lower priority the alarm has. The recommended
value is 0 to 31.

WeekReportTemplate

Indicates the path of the template of weekly reports.

Circle

Indicates the time for testing the Transdata . Avoid


closing the Transdata due to your disoperation. Test the
Transdata at regular intervals. If the Transdata is
closed, automatically start it. The default time is 10
minutes.

Scanmiddata

Indicates the scanning intervals. The default time is 60


minutes.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

9-35

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

9 Network Performance Alarms

Step 4 Add the shortcut of the TaskWatcher.exe file to the Startup folder.
----End

When the Nastar is installed, set all information about the TaskWatch.ini file based on the
actual situation. Incorrect settings for [config] may cause the failure of displaying the
performance alarms. Incorrect settings for [transdata] may cause faults in the Transdata
program. Thus, the Transdata cannot be started again. Incorrect settings for [nastar] may cause
the failure of automatically generating the daily, weekly, and monthly reports. When faults
occur to the Nastar, and the Nastar is stopped, the Nastar cannot be normally started.

9-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Generating a Network Monitoring


Report

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Section

Describes

10.1 Introduction

Introduction to the generation of network monitoring


report

10.2 Daily, Weekly and


Monthly Report

Introduction to the template setting, the generated report


and the description of results

10.3 Network Monitoring


Report

The statistics on the BSC KPIs. The BSC KPIs include


call access, call drop, handover, and performance

10.4 PCU Performance


Monitoring Report

The statistics on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs include


call access, call drop, handover, and performance

10.5 Swap Comparison Report

Mainly for operators to swap the data that does not belong
to Huawei. You can use the performance import tool, that
is, Transdata, to perform the swap of the performance
data, the Nastar GSM to query the database, before swap
and after swap, and perform the common guide line
statistic of cell grade

10.6 Enhanced Traffic


Statistics

The enhanced traffic statistics that can be customized


according to users' requirements

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-1

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10.1 Introduction
The generation of the network monitoring report is to supply the information for monitoring
reports and warnings. The monitoring report includes the KPIs of voice service, data service,
and wireless environment. The monitoring report suggests the communication quality
completely, and makes operators serve to high-end clients.
The Nastar GSM monitoring report includes following functions:

Daily, weekly, and monthly report

Network monitoring report

PCU performance monitoring report


Swap comparison report

Enhanced traffic statistics

You can export daily, weekly, and monthly reports or the system automatically exports the
reports. You can customize a template and set the exporting time. According to the template,
the Nastar GSM can generate report periodically.

10.2 Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report


10.2.1 Background
The daily report is mainly for local maintenance personnel to monitor the network
performance. In initial stages, the local maintenance personnel need to learn the running status.
They can also locate network problems through the daily report. The daily, weekly and
monthly report is intended for network operators.
The weekly and monthly report provides the following functions:

Mastering the change trend of the network performance

Analyzing the guidance line which contains worsen trend

Making optimization and running policy scientifically.

The daily and weekly reports place particular emphasis on the change trend of KPIs.

10.2.2 Generating a Daily Report


Procedures
To generate the daily report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Daily Report, as shown in Figure 10-1. Alternatively, you can
click

10-2

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Figure 10-1 Daily report command

The Daily Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-2.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Figure 10-2 Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box

Table 10-1 describes the elements in the Setting tab page of the Daily Report dialog box.
Table 10-1 Description of the Setting tab page
Element

Description

Report Saved Path Setting

10-4

Clicking
report

to select a path for saving the daily

Query Object

BSC

Selecting the BSC to be queried

Time Set

Date

Setting the date to be queried

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Element

Description
All Day
Time

Selecting All Day Time to generate the report of


the whole day

Busy Time

Selecting Busy Time to generate the report during


busy hours
NOTE
Click Modify Busy Time to open the Busy Time Set
dialog box. Set the begin time and the end time in the
Busy Time Set dialog box.

Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the daily report, select a BSC to be queried,
and set the time to be queried.
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Daily Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-3.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-5

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 10-3 Advanced tab page of the daily report dialog box

Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box. Set the decision condition for the extra busy or
idle cell and set the properties for the worst cell.

10-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups in the VIC group box.
To add more cell groups, do as follows:
1.

Click Cell Group Manage to open the Cell Group dialog box, as shown in Figure 10-4.
In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add, delete, or modify cell groups listed in the
Cell Group box.

Figure 10-4 Cell Group dialog box

2.

Click New to create a cell group.


The New Cell Group dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-5.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-7

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 10-5 New Cell Group dialog box

3.
4.

In the New Cell Group dialog box, type a cell group name, and select the cells to be
added to the group.
Click OK in the Ne w Cell Group dialog box.

Step 6 After setting the report, click OK in the Daily Report dialog box.
The generated daily report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6.

10-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Figure 10-6 Daily report

----End

Introduction to the Daily Report


The daily report involves information about cover, KPI, BSC TopN, VIC, Hot Cell, Extra
Busy_Idle, Worst Cell, All_Day Traffic Trend.
For details about each list, see section "Introduction to the Daily Report" of 10.2.5
"Introduction to the Reports."

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-9

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10.2.3 Generating a Weekly Report


Procedures
To generate a weekly report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Weekly Report, as shown in Figure 10-7. Alternatively, you can
click

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Figure 10-7 Weekly report command

10-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

The Weekly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-8.


Figure 10-8 Setting tab page of the weekly report dialog box

Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the weekly report, select the BSC to be
queried, and set the time range to be queried.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-11

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Weekly Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-9.
Figure 10-9 Advanced tab page of the Weekly Report dialog box

Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box. Set the decision condition for the extra busy or
idle cell and set the properties for the worst cell.

10-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Step 5 Select one or multiple cell groups as VIC cell groups in the VIC area.
For details about how to set the cell groups, see section 5.6.3 "Setting Cell Groups."
Step 6 After you complete the settings, click OK in the Weekly Report dialog box.
The generated weekly report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-10.
Figure 10-10 Weekly report

----End

Introduction to the Weekly Report


The weekly report comprises the following sheets:

Cover
KPI

TopN BSC

VIC

Radio completion rate trend

Call drop rate trend

TCH congestion rate trend

SDCCH congestion rate trend


TCH availability rate trend

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-13

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

SDCCH availability rate trend

CPU load trend

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

For details about each sheet, see section "Introduction to the Weekly Report" of 10.2.5
"Introduction to the Reports."

10.2.4 Generating a Monthly Report


Procedures
To generate the monthly report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Monthly Report, as shown in Figure 10-11. Alternatively, you
can also click

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

Figure 10-11 Monthly report command

10-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

The Monthly Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-12.


Figure 10-12 Setting tab of the Monthly Report dialog box

Table 10-2 describes the elements on the Setting tab page of the Monthly Report dialog box.
Table 10-2 Element on the Setting tab page
Element

Description

Report Saved Path Setting

Query Object

04 (2008-12-10)

BSC

Clicking
to specify a path for saving the
monthly report.
Selecting the BSC to be queried

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Element
Time Set

Description
Date

Setting the date to be queried.

All Day
Time

Selecting All Day Time to generate the report for


each day in a month

Busy
Time

Selecting Busy Time to generate the report for busy


hours in a month
NOTE
Click Modify Busy Time to view the Busy Time Set dialog
box. Set the begin time and end time in the displayed Busy
Time Set dialog box.

Step 2 On the Setting tab page, specify a path for saving the monthly report, select the BSC to be
queried, and set the time to be queried.
Step 3 Click the Advanced tab in the Monthly Report dialog box.
The Advanced tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-13.
Figure 10-13 Advance tab of the monthly report dialog box

10-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Step 4 Type a natural number in the TopN text box to display the first N records.
Step 5 Click OK in the Monthly Report dialog box.
The generated monthly report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-14.
Figure 10-14 Monthly report

----End

Introduction to the Monthly Report


The weekly report comprises the following sheets:

04 (2008-12-10)

Cover

KPI

BSC TopN

Worst cell

All day traffic trend, radio completion rate trend


Call drop rate trend

TCH congestion rate trend

SDCCH congestion rate trend

TCH availability rate trend

SDCCH availability rate trend

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-17

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

CPU overload trend

For details about each sheet, see section "Introduction to the Monthly Report" of 10.2.5
Introduction to the Reports."

10.2.5 Introduction to the Reports


Introduction to the Daily Report
The daily report comprises the following sheets:

Cover
The title consists of the name of the report and the date, for example, performance daily
report 24 August 2005. The date indicates the date when the daily report indicators are
recorded, not the date when the daily report is generated. The vendor name is also on the
cover. In this case, the vendor name is Huawei.

KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization to evaluate the whole network
performance, as shown in Figure 10-15. The font color of the indicators turns red if any
exception occurs.

Figure 10-15 KPI sheet in the daily report

10-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%


TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%

Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%

Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%

Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%


Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%

Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%


Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%

TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%

SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%


TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%

Call Drop Rate < 80%


SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%

TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%

SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)

BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole day or busy hours), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells,
and sort them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also specify a
new value to N (1<= N <=20).

VIC

04 (2008-12-10)

The font color of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exception
occurs, as shown in Figure 10-16.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-19

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 10-16 VIC sheet of Daily Report

The scenarios and the associated font color are listed as follows:
Red: the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true.
Red: the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true
Red: the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: the 88%
<= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true.

10-20

Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: the 90% <
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true.
Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is
true. Orange: the 92% <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio
Reasons < 95.5% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is
true.

Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to
Radio Reasons < 90% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange:
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) = 88% is true. Orange:
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5% is true.

Red: the 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: the 1%
<= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true.
Red: the 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: the 1% <= SDCCH
Call Drop Rate < 2% is true.

Red: the 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: the 0.8%
<= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true.

Red: the 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: the 2% <= TCH
Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true.
Red: the 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= TCH Loss
Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true.

Red: the 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <=
SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% is true.
Red: the 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the
1% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true.
Red: the 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange:
the 0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true.
Red: the 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: the 0.5% <= TCH
Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.

Hot Cell
According to the whole traffic of the cell in busy hour, the Nastar GSM finds the Top 10
busiest cells for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs. If a cell is a VIC cell, the
background of the cell is highlighted in yellow.

Extra-busy and extra-idle cells


The Nastar GSM lists all extra-busy and extra-idle cells, and displays the related KPIs.

Worst Cell

The Nastar GSM lists the worst cell for each BSC, and displays the related KPIs.
All-Day Traffic Trend
For the whole network and each BSC, the Nastar GSM collects the statistics of the
whole-day traffic by hour.

Introduction to the Weekly Report


The weekly report includes the following sheets:

KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance, as shown in Figure 10-17. The values of the associated indicators
are the whole statistical result of the seven days. The font color of the indicators turns
red if any exception occurs.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-21

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 10-17 KPI sheet of the weekly report

Exception may occur in the following scenarios:


Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%

TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%

Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%


Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%
Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%


Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%

TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%

SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%

TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%


Call Drop Rate < 80%

SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%

TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%


SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%

10-22

Intra-BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%


Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)

BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole-week statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the TopN worst cells, and
sorts them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a
new value to N (1<= N <=20).

VIC
The font color of the indicators for the VIC cells turns red or orange if any exceptions
occur, as shown in Figure 10-18.

Figure 10-18 VIC sheet of weekly report

The scenarios and the associated font color are listed as follows:

04 (2008-12-10)

Red: the Successful immediate assignments rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
Successful immediate assignments rate < 95% is true.

Red: the 0 <= TCH Assignment Success Rate < 92% is true. Orange: the 92% <=
TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95% is true

Red: the 0 <= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS >= 6% is true. Orange: the 88%
<= Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 92% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate >= 90%". Orange: the 90% <
Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%" is true.

Red: the 0 <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92% is
true. Orange: the 92% <= Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio
Reasons < 95.5% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-23

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Red: the 0 <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
88% is true. Orange: the 88% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 92% is
true.

Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate = 85% is true. Orange: the
85% <= Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons =
85% is true. Orange: the 85% <= Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to
Radio Reasons < 90% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) = 88% is true. Orange:
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 93% is true.

Red: the 0 <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) = 88% is true. Orange:
the 88% <= Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900)< 92.5% is true.

Red: the 2% <= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) is true. Orange: the 1%
<= TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) < 2% is true.

Red: the 2% <= SDCCH Call Drop Rate = 88% is true. Orange: the 1% <= SDCCH
Call Drop Rate < 2% is true.
Red: the 1.5% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons is true. Orange: the 0.8%
<= TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 1.5% is true.

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Red: the 3% <= TCH Loss Rate Due to Handover is true. Orange: the 2% <= TCH
Loss Rate Due to Handover < 3% is true.

Red: the 0 <= TCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <= TCH Loss
Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 98% is true.

Red: the 0 <= SDCCH Availability Rate = 95% is true. Orange: the 95% <=
SDCCH Availability Rate < 98% is true.

Red: the 2% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange: the
1% <= TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 2% is true.

Red: the 1.5% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) = 95% is true. Orange:
the 0.8% <= SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) < 1.5% is true.

Red: the 0.8% <= TCH Traffic Per Line (Erl) is true. Orange: the 0.5% <= TCH
Traffic Per Line (Erl) < 0.8% is true.

All-Week Traffic Trend


This sheet consists of the weekly traffic trend of the whole network and of each BSC.

All-Week Radio Completion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the radio completion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

All-Week Call-Drop Rate Trend


This sheet is about the call-drop rate of the whole network and of each BSC in busy hour.

All-Week TCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

All-Week SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

All-Week TCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC in
busy hour.

10-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

All-Week SDCCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate of the whole network and of each BSC
in busy hour.

All-Week CPU Overload Trend


This sheet is about the CPU overload trend of each BSC in busy hour.

Introduction to the Monthly Report


The monthly report comprises the following sheets:

KPI
The Nastar GSM analyzes KPIs and resource utilization ratio to evaluate the whole
network performance. The indicators suggest the performance in one month. The font of
the associated indicators turns red if any exceptions occur.
Exceptions may occur in the following scenarios:

Successful immediate assignments rate < 95%

TCH Assignment Success Rate < 95%

Call Setup Success Rate Due to BSS < 94%


Intra BSC Handover Success Rate < 95%

Intra BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 95.5%

Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

Outgoing BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 92%

Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate < 90%

Incoming BSC Handover Success Rate Due to Radio Reasons < 90%

Dual-band Handover Success Rate (900-1800) < 90%


Dual-band Handover Success Rate (1800-900) < 92.5%

TCH Call Drop Rate (including handover) > 1%

SDCCH Call Drop Rate > 1%

TCH Loss Rate Due to Radio Reasons >2%

Call Drop Rate < 80%

SDCCH Availability Rate < 98%

TCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 1%

SDCCH Congestion Rate (in busy time) > 0.8%

TCH Traffic Per Line > 0.5 (Erl)

BSC TopN
For each KPI (whole-month statistics), the Nastar GSM finds the worst N cells, and sorts
them in an ascending order. The default value for N is 10. You can also assign a new
value to N (1<= N <=20).

Worst Cell
This sheet lists worst cells in the last day of a month, and the frequency of a cell that
turns into the worst cell.

All-Day Traffic Trend


This sheet is about the all-day traffic of the whole network and of each BSC.

04 (2008-12-10)

Radio Completion Rate Trend

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-25

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

This sheet is about the radio completion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

Call-Drop Rate Trend


This sheet is about the call-drop rate in busy hour of the whole network and of the each
BSC.

TCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

SDCCH Congestion Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH congestion rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

TCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the TCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and of
each BSC.

SDCCH Availability Rate Trend


This sheet is about the SDCCH availability rate in busy hour of the whole network and
of each BSC.

CPU Overload Trend


This sheet is about the CPU overload rate in busy hour of each BSC.

10.2.6 Configuring the Daily, Weekly and Monthly Report


The daily, weekly and monthly timing report is finished automatically through TaskWatcher.
The procedure for configuring the TaskWatcher, see section 9.4 "Setting the Performance
Alarms."

10.3 Network Monitoring Report


According to statistical analysis on KPIs of the BSC traffic statistics, the Nastar GSM
generates a monitoring report to help engineers in different regions and in the headquarter to
familiarize themselves with the performance of each sub-network in the global network.

10.3.1 Background
The network monitoring report specially used for local engineers, the local engineers and
managers can learn the network status and network performance with efficiency from the
report.
The monitoring report can be categorized into the following types:

Engineer (BSC/CELL) monitoring report


Engineer monitoring report supplies details about network performance items, including
KPI sorting and graph analysis from BSC to cell. It is convenient for engineers to master
the whole performance status, learn the trend of network performance, and locate any
possible problem.

10-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Team leader (network/BSC )monitoring report


Team leader monitoring report reflects the whole performance status of network. The
team leader monitoring report includes KPI sorting and trend analysis of the whole
network and BSC. It is convenient for team leaders to master the whole performance
status and to perform the trend of network performance task.

Comparison monitoring report


Comparison monitoring report supports the network-level KPI analysis, compares the
improved status with the former one, and validates the optimized configuration.

10.3.2 Generating the Network Monitoring Report


The setting interface of generating the network monitoring report contains the following parts:

You can choose a BSC or a cell group to be monitored or choose several BSCs or several
cell groups to generate the network monitoring reports orderly. The number of the BSCs
and cell groups are not limited.

You can enter the statistic begin and end date.

You can choose busy time, all-day, or other user-defined time.

You can generate the engineer monitoring report, team leader monitoring report, and
comparison monitoring report.

To generate an engineer report, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 10-19. Or click
in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-27

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 10-19 Network Monitoring Report command

10-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

The Network Monitoring Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20.
Figure 10-20 Network Monitoring Report dialog box

Step 2 Click
to select a save path for the network monitoring report. Or you can use the
default directory.
Step 3 Select a BSC to be queried from the BSC list.

You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through Group Management. Click Cell
Group Management to view the Cell Group dialog box.
In the Cell Group dialog box, you can add a cell group by clicking New. You can also
delete or modify cell groups listed in the Cell Group box.

Step 4 Select the associated option based on your requirement.

04 (2008-12-10)

Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report.

Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report.

Select Compare Report to generate a compared report.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-29

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 5 Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields.
Step 6 Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day.
Select Busy Hour to generate a report for busy-hour traffic.
Click Change Busy Hour to view the Busy Hour Setting dialog box, and set the busy hour.
Select Other Time to generate a report for traffic in other time periods.
Step 7 Select the Advanced tab page, as shown in Figure 10-21.
Figure 10-21 Network Monitor Report Advanced tab page

10-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Step 8 Set the TopN.


Table 10-3 shows the setting options of the TopN.
Table 10-3 TopN
Options

Description

Value N

The default value N is 10. You can set the value N from 1 to 50.

Filtration setting

Index

The drop-down list shows all the indexes, as


shown in Figure 10-22

Condition 1

The first drop-down list is index, as shown in


Figure 10-22.
The second drop-down list is the relationship.
The relationship contains >, < >=, <= == and !=.
The third drop-down list is the value control box.
The initial value is NULL, you should input the
float value.

Condition 2

See condition 1. The relationship between


condition 1 and condition 2 is AND.

Clear all

Set all the chosen index condition as the status of


not choose, but user selecting or entering data is
not cleared. User select or input data is saved by
the program and defines the initial data when you
use the function the next time.

Select all

Select all the conditions.

Figure 10-22 Index

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-31

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 9 Set the VIC.


You can add, edit, or delete the cell group through Group Management.

If you select the VIC cell, the VIC page shows the selected cell content in the report.
If you have never selected a cell as a VIC cell, two conditions are described as follows:

Searching object is BSC, all the cells of the BSC are defined as the VIC cells.
Searching object is cell group, all the cells of the cell group are defined as the VIC
cells.

Step 10 Set the KPI baseline.


1.

Select an index. Set two thresholds for the index, the two thresholds are colored for the
index.

2.

Click Default, the Huawei KPI baseline initializes the threshold.

CAUTION
The lower limit of excellent network is not always larger than the lower limit of normal
network.

Step 11 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.


The Network Monitor Report result is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-23.

10-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Figure 10-23 Network Monitoring Report

----End
NOTE

Select Team Leader Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box
to generate a team leader report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.
Select Compare Report in the Report Type group box in the Network Monitor Report dialog box to
generate a comparison report. The other settings are similar to those in the engineer report.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-33

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10.3.3 Report Description


Engineer Monitoring Report
The engineer monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs and cell KPIs. The default
statistical period is seven days. You can set the period for collecting statistics. A report is
generated based on each selected BSC. If you plan to select several BSCs, several engineer
monitoring reports are generated at the same time.
Table 10-4 Sheets in the engineer monitoring report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the selected BSC:

Project name

BSC ID

BSC IP address
Numbers of BSCs and cells

BSC version
Network project stage

Time and period for the statistical data

Performance data

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analys is of the related KPIs

BSC KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the
trend of each KPI in a chart.

TopN cells with


exceptional KPIs

Lists TopN cells. If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be
labeled. The TopN cells are sorted based on the first indictor. Detailed
analys is is also provided in the associated links.

TopN cells with


exceptional
indicators

Provides detailed analysis on the TopN cells with exceptional


indicators. These indicators include accessibility, handover, traffic,
resource utilization rate, and call drop.
If a TopN cell is a VIC cell, the VIC cell should be labeled. The
analys is should cover failure analys is, service analysis, and process
analys is.

10-34

VIC KPI

Lists the value of each indicator in the period of statistics collection.

Readme

Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the
display modes for actual KPI values.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Team Leader Monitoring Report


The team leader monitoring report is used to monitor the BSC KPIs in the entire network. The
default statistical period is seven days. You can set a period for the statistics collection.
A team leader monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.
Table 10-5 Sheets in the team leader monitoring report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the following
items:

Project name

BSC ID

BSC IP address
Numbers of BTSs and cells

BSC version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

Performance data

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analys is of the related KPIs

Network
KPI

Analyze the trend of all the BSC or cell group KPI index. Display the KPI
index of each day data in the statistic time period and the related trend chart,
you can link the KPI index of each day data to the related trend chart.

BSC KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend
of each KPI in a chart.

Readme

Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display
modes for actual KPI values.

Comparison Monitoring Report


The comparison monitoring report is used to give the changes of the BSC KPI of different
statistical periods. You need to set the start date and measurement period for both the
comparison and the statistics collection. The default statistical period is seven days. You can
set a period for the statistics collection.
A comparison monitoring report is generated based on the selected BSC.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-35

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Table 10-6 Sheets in the comparison monitoring report


Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information of the selected BSC. The information includes the


following items:

Project name

BSC ID

BSC IP address

Numbers of BTSs and cells

BSC version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

KPI trend

Exceptional KPIs

BSC KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the trend
of each KPI in a chart.

Readme

Defines the excellent and passing thresholds for each KPI and the display
modes for actual KPI values.

10.4 PCU Performance Monitoring Report


10.4.1 Background
The PCU performance monitoring report is the statistic on the PCU KPIs. The PCU KPIs
includes call access, call drop, handover, and the performance. The PCU performance
monitoring report monitors the data operating completely and in time.
For details about the background of PCU performance monitoring report, see section 10.3.1
"Background."

10-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

10.4.2 Generating the PCU Performance Monitoring Report


To generate the PCU network monitor report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > PCU Network Monitor Report, as shown in Figure 10-24.
Figure 10-24 Analysis Reports menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-37

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Or click

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

button from the workspace on the left pane.

The PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-25.
Figure 10-25 PCU Network Monitoring Report dialog box

10-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Table 10-7 describes the elements in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
Table 10-7 Description of the Network Monitor Report dialog box
Element
File Output

Description
Click
to select a save path for the network monitor report. Or
you can use the default directory.

PCU

Select PCU from the PCU list.

Report Type

Select the associated option based on your requirement.


Select Engineer Report to generate an engineer report.
Select Team Leader Report to generate a team leader report.
Select Compare Report to generate a compare report.

Statistic Date

Select the begin date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields.
Type a value in the Compare Cycle (days) field. The value must be an
integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE
If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to
enter a valid value.

Statistic Time

Set the statistic time.

Step 2 Set the settings of the Network Monitor Report dialog box, as described in Table 10-7.
Step 3 Click OK in the Network Monitor Report dialog box.
The Network Monitor Report is generated, according to the settings in the Network
Monitor Report dialog box.
----End

10.4.3 Report Description


The PCU network monitor report is categorized into the following types:

Engineer Report

Team Leader Report

Compare Report

The PCU network monitor report aims at monitoring the KPIs of a cell. The default statistical
period is one day. You can modify the default period according to your requirements. The
PCU network monitor report is generated according to the selected PCU. Each PCU generates
one report. You can select multiple PCUs at a time and generate multiple team leader reports.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-39

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Introduction to the Engineer Report


The Engineer Report of PCU network monitor is generated according to selected PCU. The
engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report is displayed, as shown in Figure
10-26.
Figure 10-26 Engineer report type of the PCU network monitoring report

Table 10-8 describes the functions of each sheet in the Engineer Report.
Table 10-8 Functions of each sheet in Engineer Report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information about the statistic PCU:

Project name

PCU ID
PCU IP

Numbers of BSCs and cells

PCU version

Project period of the network

Statistic time and period

Performance statistics

Value of each KPI during the statistic period


Detailed analys is of the related KPIs

10-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

04 (2008-12-10)

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Sheet

Description

PCU KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the
trend of each KPI in a chart.

TopN

Lists Top 10 cells and their related indicators.

Accessibility

Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related
indicators.

Retainability

Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related
indicators.

Throughput
( Um )

Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related
indicators.

Throughput
( GB )

Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related
indicators.

Resource
Utilization

Lists the cell name and time of the Top 10 cells and their related
indicators.

VIC KPI

Lists the detailed performance indicator for all of the hot cells.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-41

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Introduction to the Team Leader Report


The PCU network monitoring report of Team Leader Report type is displayed, as shown in
Figure 10-27.
Figure 10-27 The PCU network monitoring report of Team leader report type

Table 10-9 describes the functions of each sheet in Team Leader Report.
Table 10-9 Function of each sheet in Team Leader Report

10-42

Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information about the statistic PCU. The information


includes the following items:

Project name

PCU ID

PCU IP

Numbers of BSCs and cells

PCU version

Project period of the network


Statistic time and period

Performance statistics

Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analys is of the related KPIs

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Sheet

Description

PCU KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows
the trend of each KPI in a chart.

Introduction to the Compare Report


The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type is displayed, as shown in
Figure 10-28.
Figure 10-28 The PCU network monitoring report of Compare Report type

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-43

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Table 10-10 describes the functions of each sheet in Compare Report.


Table 10-10 Function of each sheet in Compare Report
Sheet

Description

Cover

Lists information about the statistic PCU. The information includes the
following items:

Project name

PCU ID

PCU IP
Numbers of BTSs and cells

PCU version

Project period of the network


Statistic time and period

Performance statistics
Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analys is of the related KPIs

NOTE
Statistic begin time is compare time.

PCU KPI

Displays the overview of the KPI statistics for each day and shows the
trend of each KPI in a chart, however, the value of compared is displayed in
a chart.

10.5 Swap Comparison Report


10.5.1 Background
The swap comparison report is used for operators to swap the data that does not belong to
Huawei. You can swap other vendors' data to Huawei equipment

After swapping is complete, you need to provide the related synchronization swap
function of traffic data. You can use the traffic data import tool Transdata of Nastar GSM
to perform the traffic data swap.

The Nastar GSM also supplies the common KPI statistic function for before and after
swap. You can use the Nastar GSM to query database traffic about before swap and after
swap.

The swap comparison report is convenient for users to know the change status of network
performance.

10-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

10.5.2 Generating the Swap Comparison Report


The sheet range of the swap comparison report can be set, as follows:

You can choose the statistical cell group. You can choose more than one cell groups to
generate the report. The numbers of the swap comparison reports are not limited..

You can input the date before swap, after swap, and during a statistic cycle.

You can choose busy time, all day, and other.


You can set the extra worse cell.

To generate the swap comparison report, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Swap Comparison Report, as shown in Figure 10-29.
Figure 10-29 Swap Comparison Report

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-45

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Or click

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

in the Network Monitor pane in the workspace.

The Swap Comparison Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-30.
Figure 10-30 Swap Compare

Step 2 Click
directory.

to select a save path for the network monitor report. Or you can use the default

Step 3 Set statistic date, statistic date before swap, statistic date after swap, and comparison period of
the swap. The comparison period of the swap is from 0 to 31.
Step 4 Set statistic time. The default time is all-day. You can set several busy time, but the busiest
time is three, or set other time.
Step 5 The extra bad cell setting contains TCH Traffic per line ( ERL ), TCH Call Drop Rate
( Including Hanover% ), TCH Congestion Rate ( Including Handover% ). The default
values are 0.1, 3 and 5. You can change the values. Set the parameters in the Swap Compare
dialog box based on the descriptions in the table.

10-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Step 6 Click OK in the Swap Compare dialog box.


The Swap Comparison report is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-31.
Figure 10-31 Swap Comparison Report

----End

10.5.3 Report Description


You can compare the KPI before swap with that after swap. The default statistic cycle is seven
days. You can change the date period. The swap comparison report takes the cell group as the
statistic object, you can do statistic according to the selected time range.
Table 10-11 describes the functions of each sheet in the Swap Comparison Report.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-47

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Table 10-11 Sheets in the swap comparison report


Sheet

Description

Cover

Listing information about the statistic Swap Compare Report:

CellGroup KPI
Compare

Project name

BSC/Net Name

Numbers of BTS

Numbers of CELL

Numbers of transceiver (TRX)


BSC Version

Project Phase

TCH traffic volume

Statistic time and period


Swap compare time

Update time

Performance statistics
Value of each KPI during the statistic period

Detailed analys is of the related KPIs

Displaying the overview of the cell group KPI statistics for each day
and shows the trend of each KPI in a chart
Displaying the KPI change trend by the way of displaying on map

Cell KPI

Displaying the overview of the cell KPI statistics for each day and
shows the trend of each KPI in a chart.
Displaying the KPI change trend by the way of displaying on map

Readme

Describing the definition of key performance items, the legend of key


performance items, symbol note and formula

10.6 Enhanced Traffic Statistics


10.6.1 Background
Enhanced traffic statistics can be customized based on various demands of different customers.
Using this method, you can execute the arithmetic operation, including summing up, average,
maximum, and minimum, according to dates, periods, cells, cell groups, and different
categories of BSCs.
The enhanced traffic statistics involves the following two operations:

10-48

Setting the template of traffic statistics

Querying the template of traffic statistics

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

10.6.2 Setting the Template of Traffic Statistics


To set the template of traffic statistics, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Traffic Statistics
The Report Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-32.
Figure 10-32 Report Output dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-49

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Table 10-12 shows the parameters setting.


Table 10-12 Output setting of the report
Setting Item

Setting type

Setting Description

Report name

Enter the report name

Report introduction

Input the description information of


the report

Export mode

Select Horizontal Form from


Vertical Form

Horizontal Form refers to


the report output in the form
of a horizontal table by hour
Vertical Form refers to the
report output in the form of a
vertical table by hour.

Statistic date

Input begin and end date, select


Type as Whole or List

Whole refers to the


arithmetic operation to the
selected range of time. The
result is a generated record.
The algorithm for each index
varies, which is based on
different settings for the
arithmetic operations, such
as summing up and
maximum.
List refers to the detailed
information about the
selected range of time. For
example, from 8 to 12, four
detailed messages are
generated.

Statistic time

Set statistic time period


Select Type as Whole, List or
Actual Busy Hour

Actual Busy Hour refers to


the hour that experiences the
busiest traffic.

Statistic Object

Set statistic object type

There are three types: cell,


cell group, and BSC
If a cell is selected, the
information listed in the
combo box is that of the cell.
The entire template statistics
is based on the selected cell.
Likewise, if a cell group or a
BSC is selected, the listed
information is about the
previous indexes
respectively.

10-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Setting Item

Setting type

Setting Description

Choose Index

Select statistic object type and


object.

Multiple indexes can be


chosen. Each has different
algorithm such as summing
up, average number. The
indexes vary with the
statistic date and time.

Step 2 For some frequently used templates, click Save on the upper right corner, as shown in Figure
10-33.
Figure 10-33 Saving a template

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-51

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

For the templates that are no more used, perform the following step:
Choose Performance Analysis > Frequently Used Statistic Template, and then click Delete on the
upper right corner.

----End

10.6.3 Generating the Traffic Statistic Report


Querying the template of traffic statistics involves the following frequently used operations:

Querying the common template


Choose Analysis Reports > Common Statistics, and select the required template. In the
displayed dialog box, click Report Output at the bottom.

Querying the temporary template


Choose Analysis Reports > Enhanced Traffic Statistics.
At the prompt, type the methods of data statistics accordingly, and then click Report
Output at the bottom of the dialog box, as shown in Figure 10-34.

10-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

Figure 10-34 Report output

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-53

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

An .xls report is generated. as shown in Figure 10-35 .


Figure 10-35 Generating an .xls report

10.6.4 Report Description


Generating the traffic statistic report contains the following two parts.

10-54

.xls report template for common use

According to the template setting, a generated report consists of object name, statistic
begin time, statistic end time, statistic time range and each KPI value in created
template.

You can analyze the generated result secondly. For details about the content, see
section 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

10 Generat ing a Netwo rk Monitoring Report

.xls report template for temporary use

04 (2008-12-10)

Firstly, Setting template, and generating the related report


Secondly, analyzing the generated result for details about the content, see section5.7.1
"Operating the Analys is Table."

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

10-55

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Further Locating Network Problems

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.

04 (2008-12-10)

Title

Description

11.1 Introduction

The functions of network problem location.

11.2 Analyzing the


Configuration

How to use the Nastar GSM to check the configuration


data and generate the check report.

11.3 Querying Performance


Data

How to query the performance counters and


performance counter conditions, and how to draw
queried results and geographically display the
performance counters.

11.4 Analyzing Performance

The performance analysis of the KPIs, PS KPIs, cell


accessibility, retainability, and mobility.

11.5 Analyzing Frequency

Introduction to the frequency.

11.6 Analyzing Neighbors

Introduction to the neighbors.

11.7 Analyzing CHR

Introduction to the CHR analyzing.

11.8 Analyzing the TRX


Performance

Introduction to the half rate and full rate of TRX


measurement performance.

11.9 Analyzing Antenna &


Feeder

The location and analysis of problems related to the


antenna and feeder system.

11.10 Analyzing Auto


Frequency Optimize

The analysis of automatic frequency optimization.

11.11 Analyzing Weak


Coverage and Over Coverage

The procedures for analyzing over coverage and weak


coverage.

11.12 Checking for TRX


Hidden Fault

The TRX hidden fault check.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.1 Introduction
As to the Huawei GSM network, the Nastar GSM provides the following functions:

Configuration analys is

Performance analysis

Neighbors analys is

Frequency analysis
TRX measurement report analysis

Antenna & feeder report analysis


Uplink interference analysis

11.2 Analyzing the Configuration


11.2.1 Background
In the process of optimizing the network, you can use the Nastar GSM to check whether
configuration data is reasonable and to generate a check report.
Table 11-1 describes the function of the configuration analysis.
Table 11-1 Description of configuration analysis

11-2

Function

Description

Auto Frequency
Optimization Report

The report of uplink ARFCNS scan data exported, can


distinguish BCCH and TCH, and advise the optimize point
and export the script.

Planning Neighbors and


Configuration Check Report

The data of configuration check report is frequency


planning and neighbor relation of user planning or
optimized adjusting.

Configuration Check Report

The configuration parameters compare appointed BSC


configuration parameters and appointed template base line,
export the configuration parameters different with the
template base line, then generate the configuration check
report

Configuration Parameters
Comparison Report

For the key configuration parameters of the BSC, the


Nastar GSM takes the latest data comparison of the history
data, export the changed configuration parameters, and
generate the configuration parameter compare report

Geographical Display for


Configuration Parameters

The Nastar GSM supplies the function of displaying the key


configuration parameters of cell on map.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Function

Description

Using Configuration
Parameters to Update
Project Parameters

You can use configuration parameters to update project


parameters, and keep consistent with present network data.
You can refer to the newest project parameter in other place
conveniently.

11.2.2 Analyzing the Frequency Optimization


Auto Frequency Optimization Report
To generate a frequency optimization report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Auto Frequency Optimization Report or Click Auto
Frequency Optimize > Auto Frequency Optimization Report in the Trouble Shooting
pane in the workspace.
The Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1 Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-3

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 Click
to select a save path for auto frequency optimization report. Or you can use the
default directory.
Step 3 Select a BSC from the BSC list.
The default choice is BSC Top10. You can also choose Select 10 Cells (Must In One BSC).
NOTE

If you choose the latter, the Export S cript function in the Advance Setting tab page is disabled.

Step 4 Click the Advance Setting tab page.

If the related data has not been imported from Transdata, the tab page is displayed, as
shown in Figure 11-2.

Figure 11-2 Auto Frequency Optimization Report (No data there)

11-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

If the related data has been imported from the Transdata, an Advance Setting dialog box
is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-3.

Figure 11-3 Advance Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box

Step 5 Set Frequency band.


Select a band from the Frequency band drop-down list to analysis.
NOTE

The Frequency band drop-down list enabled only when the related data is imported from the Transdata.
There are four bands, P-GSM , E-GSM , R-GSM , and DCS1800.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 6 You can choose three range bands at most.


Table 11-2 shows the frequency band and the related frequency range.
Table 11-2 Frequency band and range
Frequency Band

Frequency Range

P-GSM

From 1 to 124

E-GSM

From 975 to 1023

R-GSM

From 955 to 974

DCS1800

From 512 to 885

The export setting item is optional. You can choose or clear the Export Script check box.
Meanwhile, you can set Save Path.
Step 7 Click Report Out Setting tab, Click Report Out Setting tab, and then set the Setting option,
the default selection is unselected, the tab page is displayed ,as shown in Figure 11-4.
If the reference is selected, the check box on the right enabled, and the default value is 5, you
can modify the value with the value 1 to 10.

11-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-4 Report Out Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-7

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 8 Click OK on the Report Out Setting tab page of the Auto Frequency Optimization Report
dialog box.
The Auto Frequency Optimization Report is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-5.
Figure 11-5 Auto Frequency Optimization Report

----End

Report Description
The Auto Frequency Optimization Report mainly comprises following sheets:

11-8

Overview
The Overview describes all items and displays the Whole NET BCCH Interference Max
TOP 10, the Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10, the Whole NET TCH
Interference Max TOP 10, and the Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10 in the
form of a chart.

Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10 analysis


The Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10 analysis displays the result of the
Whole NET BCCH Interference Max TOP 10, including Interference Power Value of
each cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power
Value, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power
Value.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10


The Whole NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10 displays the result of the Whole
NET BCCH Interference Average TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each
cell, fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information about the recommended Power Value.

Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10


The Whole NET TCH Interference Max TOP 10 displays the result of the Whole NET
TCH Interference Max TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.

Whole NET TCH Interference Average TOP 10


The Whole NET TCH Interference Average top 10 displays the result of the Whole NET
TCH Interference Average TOP 10, including interference Power Value of each cell,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart, recommended Power Value,
fluctuate neighbor frequency information and chart of the recommended Power Value.
NOTE

When you choose Select 10 Cells (Must In One BSC) in Base Setting, the former 10 cells are
chosen by default.

Only if there is related data of up Power Value in database, the Ban d S etting and Range Setting is
active.

If you choose Export S cript, the Export S cript will generate .txt file in the related directory.
If the Auto Frequency Optimization Report exists blank value in the auto frequency check report, the
sign is displayed.

11.2.3 Planning Neighbors and Configuration Check Report


Check the rationality of the project parameters to prevent the irrational parameters from being
imported.
To generate the result of checking in an .xls format, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > ProjectPara Check Report Analysis.
The Project Parameter Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-6.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-6 Project Parameter Check dialog box

Step 2 Click

to select a path for saving the report, or use the default path.

Step 3 Set the Sheet Setting item.


Step 4 Set the numbers of fewer neighbor and the distance of far neighbor.
Step 5 Click OK.
The parameter rationality check report is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-7.

11-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-7 ProjectPara Check Report in an .xls file

The report shows the result of frequency utilization check, channel check, Co-BCCH
Co-BSIC check, Co-BCCH&Co-BSIC check, single neighbors check, cells with fewer
neighbor check, and far neighbor check.
----End

11.2.4 Configuration Check Report


For details about configuration check report, see section 5.2.5 "Checking Parameters."

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-11

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.2.5 Configuration Parameters Comparison Report


Generating the Configuration Parameters Comparison Report
To generate the configuration parameters comparing report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Configuration Parameters Comparison Report.
The Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 11-8.
Figure 11-8 Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box

11-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Table 11-3 describes the items in the Configuration Parameter Comparison Report dialog
box.
Table 11-3 Description of the Configuration parameter comparison report dialog box
Item

Description

File output

Click
to select a save path for the configuration parameter
Comparison report. Or you can use the default directory.

Select BSC

Select a BSC from the BSCs list. By default, all BSCs are chosen.

Net database

The net database is current the currently chosen database. Its created
date is displayed.

Backup network
database

Select one backup net database from the Backup Name drop-down
list, to compare with the chosen Net Database.

Step 2 Set all parameters according to Table 11-3, and then click OK in the Configuration
Parameter Comparison Report dialog box, as shown in Figure 11-9.
Figure 11-9 Configure parameter compare report

----End
NOTE

Each selected BSC can generate one report at a time.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-13

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Report Description
The report mainly comprises the following sheets:

Overview
Describes all items

Displays related guide line of current BSC

Site adjust, cell adjust, TRX adjust, frequency adjust, neighbors cell adjust, cell
parameters adjust
Displays the related site adjust information, cell adjust information, TRX adjust
information, frequency adjust information, neighbors cell adjust information, cell
parameters adjust information.

11.2.6 Geographical Display for Configuration Parameters


For details about the geographical display for configuration parameters, see section 6.2.8
"Displaying Project Parameters."

11.2.7 Using Configuration Parameters to Update Project


Parameters
For details about using configuration parameters to update project parameters, see section
"Downloading Configuration Data" of 5.2.2 "Management of Configuration Data."

11.3 Querying Performance Data


11.3.1 Background
The Nastar GSM helps you analyze the optimized data of networks, so that you can find a
problematic region quickly. It also supplies many methods for locating problems, to help you
sort the problem to cell grade and analyze the reason of a problem to original performance
statistic point.
The Nastar GSM analyzes the performance data with multi-time granularity and
multi-dimens ionality method. The functions are as follows:

Displaying the network performance status on a map and a trend chart.

Comparing the multi-time band and multi-guideline

11.3.2 Querying Performance Guideline


For details about querying performance guideline, see section "Exporting the Query Results to
an .xls File" of 5.7.1 "Operating the Analysis Table."

11.3.3 Drawing Query Result


For details about drawing query result, see section "Quick Drawing" of 5.7.1 "Operating the
Analys is Table."

11-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.3.4 Geographical Performance Guideline


For details about geographical performance guideline, see section 5.7.1 "Operating the
Analys is Table."

11.3.5 TopN Sorting for Cells Performance Guide Line


This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated
KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI.
Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs.
To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-10.
Figure 11-10 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-15

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 On the Query Item tab page, select a query item from the Select Query Item list.
Step 3 Enter a value in the field of Top N.
Step 4 Set the sort order.

If Descend is select, the query result is displayed in a descending order.

If Descend is deselected, the query result is displayed in an ascending order.

Step 5 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page to set filter conditions.
Step 6 On the Time Range tab page, set the date and the busy hour period.
Step 7 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.


Network Group: select cells by cell group.

You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells.
Step 8 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 9 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

11.4 Analyzing Performance


11.4.1 Analyzing the KPI Performance
Analyzing BSC-Level KPI
To analyze the BSC-level KPI, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click BSC-level KPI Analysis under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
Trouble Shooting page.

11-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

The BSC-level KPI Analysis navigation tree is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-11.
Figure 11-11 Trouble Shooting item list

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-17

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

The BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-12.
Figure 11-12 BSC-level KPI Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date group box, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.
In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-13.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

11-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-13 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the BSCs to be queried from the BSC list.
You can select one or multiple BSCs.
The Queried Objects tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-14.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-19

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-14 Objects tab page

Step 4 Click OK.


The query result is generated.
----End

Analyzing the BSC Overall Performance


This task is performed to analyze the indicators related to the BSC overall performance of
Huawei.
The procedure is the same as that described in section "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI" of 11.4.1
"Analyzing the KPI Performance."

11-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell


The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in
each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and to display the values of
KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained.
To analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat under the KPI Performance Analysis
node on the Trouble Shooting tab page, as shown in Figure 11-15.
Figure 11-15 Trouble Shooting tab page

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-21

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

The One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-16.
Figure 11-16 One Week Trend of Cell's KPI Stat dialog box

Step 2 Select only one query condition on the Query Item tab page.

11-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 3 Select the Time Range tab page, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-17.
Figure 11-17 Time Range tab of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box

You can perform the following settings:

04 (2008-12-10)

In the Date area, select a date from the End Date drop-down list to specify the query
date, and then the system can automatically generate the begin date according to the end
date you selected. Or click Common date to use the default common date set by the
system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-13. Only
one busy time period is allowed.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-23

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, as shown in Figure 11-18, specify the query object. You
can select the object type: Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of
the desired NEs.
Figure 11-18 Queried Objects tab page of the One Week Trend of Cells KPI Stat dialog box

You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

11-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis


This function is to analyze KPIs of the cell level or BSC level in a specified time, and displays
the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view.
The procedure is the same as that described in section "Analyzing BSC-Level KPI" of 11.4.1
"Analyzing the KPI Performance".

Customizing the Cell Filter


During the network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter faulty cells.
To filter out faulty cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click User-defined Cell Filter under the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
The User-defined Cell Filter dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-19.
Figure 11-19 User-defined Cell Filter dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-25

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page.


The Query Filter Condition dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-20.
Figure 11-20 Query Filter Condition dialog box

In the Query Filter Condition dialog box, perform the following settings:

Set AND or OR operator, field, condition, and limit value. Click OK, and then the
conditions are added to the list.

Click Condition Check to check whether the setting is correct.

Click Clear Condition to clear the setting.

After the setting is complete, click OK to return to the Query Item tab page.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

11-26

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.
In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-21. A
maximum of three time ranges can be specified.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-21 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

Analyzing the TOPN Cells


This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated
KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI.
Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs.
To analyze the TopN cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click TopN Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The TopN Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-22.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-27

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-22 TopN Cell Analysis dialog box

Step 2 On the Query Item tab page, perform the following settings:

Select a query item from the Select Query Item list.

Only one item is allowed.


Set the sort order.

11-28

If Descend is selected, the query result is displayed in a descending order.

If Descend is cleared, the query result is displayed in an ascending order

Click Filter Setting on the Query Item tab page, and set filter conditions in the
displayed dialog box.
For details on setting filter conditions, see section "Customizing the Cell Filter" Step 2 of
11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-23.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 11-23 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
You can select a maximum of 64 cells. By default, the system queries all of the cells.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell


The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of
multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs
for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-29

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

To draw the trend chart of the KPIs for a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
The Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-24.
Figure 11-24 Cell KPI Trend Chart & Sheet dialog box

Step 2 On the Items tab page, select three query items from the Select Query Item list.

11-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-25. A
maximum of three busy time ranges are allowed.

Figure 11-25 Busy Time Modify dialog box

By default, the system queries the cell indicators of the whole day.

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When
more than eight cells are available, the system queries only the first eight cells.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-31

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-26 shows the Queried Objects tab page.


Figure 11-26 Queried Objects tab page

Step 5 Click OK.


The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

11-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Analyzing the Extra Bad Cells


You can search for the worst cells by using the filter conditions.
The filter conditions consist of the following parts:

TCH call drop occurs more than six times.

TCH traffic volume of each line ranges from 0.1 to 0.6.

To statistically analyze the worst cells, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Double-click Extra Bad Cell Analysis of the KPI Performance Analysis node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
The Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-27.
Figure 11-27 Extra Bad Cell Analysis dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-33

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you can
click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-28.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 11-28 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs
By default, the system queries all of the cells. You can select a maximum of eight cells. When
more than eight cells are available, the system queries only eight cells.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

11-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.4.2 Analyzing the Performance of PS KPIs


Analyzing the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)
The function is performed to analyze the values of KPIs for all cells or for selected cells in
each day of a week according to the user-defined time and KPIs, and display the values of
KPIs in different colors. In this way, the trend of the KPIs for a cell during a week is obtained.
To learn how to analyze the weekly trend of the KPIs for a cell (PS), see section "Analyzing
the Weekly Trend of the KPIs for a Cell" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."

Analyzing the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis (PS)


This function is performed to analyze KPIs of cell-level or BSC-level in a specified time, and
to display the results of the KPI indicators in a multi-chart view.
To know how to analyze the KPIs for a cell on an hourly basis (PS), see section "Analyzing
the KPIs for a Cell on an Hourly Basis" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."

Customizing the Cell Filter (PS)


During the network optimization, you can set filter conditions to filter faulty cells.
To know how to filter out problematic cell (PS), see section "Customizing the Cell Filter " of
11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."

Analyzing TopN Cells (PS)


This function is performed to sort the specified cells according to the values of the associated
KPIs. The TopN cell analysis helps you to view the rank of each cell based on a specified KPI.
Meanwhile, this function supports condition filtering for specified KPIs.
To know how to analyze TopN cells (PS), see section "Analyzing the TOPN Cells" of 11.4.1
"Analyzing the KPI Performance."

Drawing the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell (PS)


The Cell KPI Trend Chart is used to directly analyze, query, and compare the KPIs of
multiple cells during a period. The Nastar GSM automatically draws the values of the KPIs
for a cell on three areas in the chart window. Different cells are highlighted in different colors.
To know how to draw cell KPI trend chart of the KPIs for a cell (PS), see section "Drawing
the Trend Chart of the KPIs for a Cell" of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."

Analyzing the Extra Bad Cell (PS)


You can search for the worst cells using the filter conditions.
The filter conditions consist of:

TCH call drop occurs more than six times.

TCH traffic volume of each line ranges from 0.1 to 0.6.

To know how to statistically analyze the extra bad cells (PS), see section "Analyzing the Extra
Bad Cells " of 11.4.1 "Analyzing the KPI Performance."

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-35

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.4.3 Analyzing the Cell Accessibility


This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to cell accessibility.
To analyze the cell accessibility (BSC32), perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) of the Accessibility node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
The Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-29.
Figure 11-29 Cell Access Analysis (BSC32) dialog box

11-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-30.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 11-30 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
NOTE

If you click Multi-View S etting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting
dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window.
The setting of cell access analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of cell access analysis (BSC32).

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-37

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.4.4 Analyzing the Retainability Performance


This function is performed to analyze the performance indicators related to call drop.
To analyze the SDCCH/TCH call drop (BSC32), perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) of the Retainability node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
The SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
11-31.
Figure 11-31 SDCCH /TCH Drops Analysis (BSC32) dialog box

11-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-32.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 11-32 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
NOTE

If you click Multi-View S etting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting
dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window.
The setting of SDCCH/TCH Drops Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of SDCCH/TCH Drops
Analysis (BSC32).

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-39

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.4.5 Analyzing the Cell Mobility


Analyzing the Intercell Handover
This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to inter-cell handover.
To analyze the inter-cell handover(BSC32), perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Inter-cell Handover Analysis (BSC32) of the Mobility node on the Trouble
Shooting page.
Figure 11-33 shows the Inter-cell Handover Analysis (BSC32) dialog box.
Figure 11-33 Inter-cell handover analysis(BSC32) dialog box

11-40

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-34.

A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.


Figure 11-34 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
NOTE

If you click Multi-View S etting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting
dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window.
The setting of inter-cell handover analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of inter-cell handover analysis
(BSC32).

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-41

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Analyzing the Outgoing Inter-cell Handover


This function is performed to analyze the KPIs related to the outgoing inter-cell handover.
The analysis method of the outgoing inter-cell handover is similar to that of the inter-cell
handover. To learn how to analyze the outgoing inter-cell handover, see "Analyzing the Cell
Mobility
Analyzing the Intercell Handover."

Analyzing the Missing Neighboring


To analyze the cell missing neighboring(BSC32), perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32) of the Mobility node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
The Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32) dialog is displayed, as shown in Figure
11-35
Figure 11-35 Missing Neighboring Cell Analysis(BSC32)

11-42

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin Date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.

In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time, as shown in Figure 11-36.
A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.

Figure 11-36 Busy Time Modify dialog box

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, specify the query object. You can select the object type:
Network Element or Network Group. Select the check boxes of the desired NEs.
Step 4 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
NOTE

If you click Multi-View S etting during task modification, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting
dialog box is displayed. You can set the index item in the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting window.
The setting of missing neighboring cell analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of missing neighboring cell
analysis(BSC32).

Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors


For details about Redundant Neighboring Cell Analys is, see section 11.6.8 "Analyzing the
Redundant Neighbors."

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-43

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.5 Analyzing Frequency


11.5.1 Background
Frequency analysis function can check the configuration frequency in the optimization period
or programming frequency in the programming period. You can adjust the frequency in time.
During performing the frequency analysis function, the Nastar GSM provides the following
functions:

Supporting multiple manners of frequency analysis


Allowing you to set analysis parameters according to the network condition.
Supporting geography display
Supporting outputting the frequency modification as the Huawei facility script

There are some common functions to analyze a network, such as adjacent channel check,
co-channel and co-BSIC check, unused ARFCNS check, spectrum distribution check, co-HSN
and co-MA check, and frequency optimization check.
The Nastar GSM supports the following frequencies, as described in Table 11-4.
Table 11-4 The range of frequency point and their corresponding frequency band
Frequency band

Frequency point range

P-GSM 900

1 n 124

E-GSM 900

0 n 124
975 n 1023

R-GSM 900

0 n 124
955 n 1023

11-44

DCS 1800

512 n 885

PCS 1900

512 n 810

GSM 450

259 n 293

GSM 480

306 n 340

GSM 850

128 n 251

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.5.2 Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel


The MA list of the hopping frequency is considered as the frequency point of the co-channel
and adjacent channel check.

Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Cell


To check neighbor co-frequency by cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-frequency Adj-frequency Check > By Cell, as shown in
Figure 11-37.
Figure 11-37 Frequency analysis by cell shortcut menu

Figure 11-38 shows the Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box.
Figure 11-38 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box

Step 2 Enter the semi diameter of the cell for check.


Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field:

Co-channel

Adjacent-channel

BCCH, TCH

Display labels with Distinguished BCCD and TCH

Step 4 Click OK
The mouse pointer is changed into a cross pointer.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-45

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 5 Select a cell in the Site View window, and check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the
selected cell.
The Channel check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-39.
Figure 11-39 Channel check dialog box

The current channel is shown in the Current Channel field.


Step 6 You can select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click
the frequency.

or

to switch

----End

Checking Neighbor Co-Frequency by Frequency


To check neighbor co-frequency by frequency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-frequency Adj-frequency Check > By ARFCN, as
shown in Figure 11-40.
Figure 11-40 Frequency analysis by ARFCN shortcut menu

The Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-41.

11-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-41 Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel Check dialog box

Step 2 Select a frequency band from the drop-down list, and the frequency range auto fill the related
frequency band.
When the frequency band has two sections, the system supports frequency band display
automatically, and the second frequency band range selected with filling the related frequency
point.
The range of frequency point and their corresponding frequency band, as shown in Table
11-4.
Step 3 Select one or multiple items for check in the Check Option field:

Co-channel check

Adjacent-channel check

BCCH

TCH

Step 4 Click OK to check the co-channel and adjacent channel of the selected frequency on the
whole network.
The ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-42.
Figure 11-42 ARFCN Check dialog box

The current frequency is shown in the Current ARFCN field of the ARFCN Check dialog
box.
Step 5 Select a frequency from the drop-down list, or click
frequency.

or

to switch the

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-47

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Implications of Each CI
If BCCH and TCH are both selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box, the
system marks B, T, B-T and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel.
The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:

B-T: compares the BCCH and TCH to current frequency. Meanwhile, the value in TCH
is the down (upper) adjacent channel of the current frequency.

T-T: compares the TCH of this cell to current frequency. Meanwhile the upper and down
adjacent channels also exist in TCH, and the BCCH is neither adjacent nor equal to the
current frequency.

B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (down) adjacent channel and the
TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current frequency.

T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the up adjacent channel of current
frequency, and BCCH value is neither adjacent to nor equal to current frequency, as
shown in Figure 11-43 and Figure 11-44.

Figure 11-43 Check result of the adjacent channel

11-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-44 Legend window

11.5.3 Checking Co-Channel and Co-BSIC


To check co-channel and co-BSIC, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check, as shown in Figure 11-45.
Figure 11-45 Co-BCCH Co-BSIC Check menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-49

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

The Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-46.
Figure 11-46 Search Co-BCCH BSIC Cells dialog box

Step 2 Select one of the following search types in the Search Select field.

Search by specified BCCH and BSIC


Enter the cell number of the specified BCCH and BSIC, and the cells are displayed in
certain color in the Site View window.

Search co-BCCH co-BSIC in neighbors


Search the co-BSIC cells that are mutually adjacent cells.

Search Co-BCCH Co-BSIC cells in the whole network


Search the co-channel and co-BSIC cell in the whole network, and calculate the distance
between the two cells.

Step 3 Click OK.


The Co-channel and Co-BSIC Cell Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
11-47.
Figure 11-47 Co-channel and Co-BSIC cell check dialog box

11-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 4 Select a cell in the Co-channel and co-BSIC Cell Check dialog box, and right-click the
selected cell to save the check result in .txt format.
NOTE

Click the table header (BCCH, BSIC, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header.
Click the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, and double-click the header to sort out
the cells in a descending order.

----End

11.5.4 Checking Idle ARFCNS


To check the idle ARFCNS, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Idle ARFCNS, as shown in Figure 11-48.
Figure 11-48 Idle ARFCNS menu

The Idle ARFCN Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-49.
Figure 11-49 Idle ARFCN Check dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-51

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 Set the region for check.

Whole network

Selected area
If Selected area is selected, you can use
window to select cells.

or

on the toolbar of the Site View

Step 3 Set the frequency range.


Step 4 Click OK to check the idle frequency.
The Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box is displayed, showing Idle ARFCN list, Used
ARFCN and times, as shown in Figure 11-50.
Figure 11-50 Idle ARFCN Query Results dialog box

----End

11.5.5 Checking Spectrum Utilization Rate


To check the spectrum utilization rate, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Spectrum Utilization, as shown in Figure 11-51.

11-52

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-51 Spectrum Utilization menu

The Spectrum Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-52.


Figure 11-52 Spectrum Utilization dialog box

Step 2 Set the ARFCN range.


Step 3 Select the ARFCN type.

BCCH
TCH

Step 4 Click OK to check the BCCH or TCH spectrum utilization rate.


The ARFCN Utilization dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-53.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-53

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-53 Result dialog box of ARFCN Utilization Check

Step 5 Select an ARFCN in the ARFCN Utilization dialog box, and right-click the selected ARFCN
to save the check result in .txt format.
NOTE

Click the table header (Allocate Times, Cell Count, or Utilization) to sort out all cells based on the
selected header. Click the header once to sort out the ARFCNs in an ascending order, or double-click the
header to sort out the ARFCNs in a descending order.

----End

11.5.6 Checking Co-HSN and Co-MA


When different cells have the same MA and the same HSN during setting the hopping data for
cells, the network call quality will be seriously influenced. You can check the distance
between the same HSN cell and the same MA cells to avoid the influence.
To check co-HSN co-MA, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Co-HSN Co-MA Check, as shown in Figure 11-54.
Figure 11-54 Co-HSN Co-MA Check menu

11-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

The Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-55.
Figure 11-55 Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box

The MA cells are listed in the Co-HSN Co-MA Check dialog box.
Step 2 Select a cell, and right-click the selected cell to save the check result.
NOTE

Click the table header (HSN, M A, or Distance) to sort out all cells based on the selected header. Click
the header once to sort out the cells in an ascending order, double-click the header to sort out the cells in
a descending order.
During 1x 1 frequency hopping check, the phenomenon of another two cells unselected appear in the
same site is normal.

----End

11.5.7 Checking Frequency Optimization


Frequency optimization check generates the analysis result of the frequency interference
between cells and the frequency utilization rate.
By using the current frequency (BCCH, TCH), adjacent frequency, and a set of available
frequencies previously set in the network, you can obtain the idle frequencies for selection.
To check the frequency optimization, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Frequency Optimization Check.
The Channel Check dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-56.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-55

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-56 Channel Check dialog box

Step 2 Set the distance range for the cells to be checked.


The default value is 30.0000.
You can choose three ways to set the frequency range. The frequency supports the range from
0 to 1023. The distance choice is 2-2.5 times of average coverage distance of cell antenna
power. For example, the cell sending power coverage distance is 10 km. You need to analyze
only Co-frequency adj-frequency cells in 20 kilometers.
You can analyze one of the frequency ranges of all frequencies. If the analysis distance is far,
the analysis time is long. When the frequency range is wide, the analysis time is long.
Step 3 Click OK.
The mouse turns into the across state.
Step 4 Select a cell in the Site View window.
The selected cell is marked in green and the ARFCN Display dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 11-57.

11-56

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-57 ARFCN Display dialog box

Table 11-5 describes the elements in the ARFCN Display dialog box.
Table 11-5 Description of the ARFCN Display dialog box
Element

Description

Current ARFCN

Showing the frequency list of the current cell. The first row
shows the BCCH frequency, and the following rows show the
TCH frequency.

Neighbor ARFCN

Listing all the frequencies used by the cell, including BCCH


and TCH. The frequencies are listed in an ascending order.

Idle ARFCN

Showing the used frequency.

Step 5 Perform the following operations in the ARFCN Display dialog box.

Click a record in the Idle ARFCN list to display the cell with co-channel and neighbors
in the set range.

Click an ARFCN in the Current ARFCN list to check co-channel and neighbors in the
range set by you.

Click a record in the Neighbor ARFCN list to show the information about the neighbors.
Mark the co-frequency and neighbors of the ARFCN (display on the map).

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-57

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.5.8 Generating the Frequency Hopping Check Report


To generate the report of checking hopping frequency, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Frequency Analys is > Frequency Hopping Check Report, as shown in Figure 11-58.
Figure 11-58 Frequency Analysis menu

The Hopping Report Object Setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-59.
Figure 11-59 Hopping report object setting dialog box

11-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 Select a path for saving the frequency hopping check report
Step 3 Select objects to be checked in the Object Select list.
Step 4 Click OK.
The report of checking hopping frequency is generated, as shown in Figure 11-60.
Figure 11-60 Frequency hopping check report in .xls format

----End
NOTE

The hopping report only supports HUAWEI BSC32 data.

11.5.9 Exporting the Frequency Scripts


According to the adjusted frequency optimize result of configuration data. The Nastar GSM
analyzes the project parameters. According to the required interface of product, the Nastar
GSM exports script files.
The prerequisite is the information about the local frequency is downloaded from the server
and updated.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-59

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

To export the frequency scripts, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Choose Frequency Analysis > Export Frequency Script > Last Closed.
The dialog box for exporting a path is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-61.
Figure 11-61 Browse For Folder

Step 2 Choose the directory.


The directory is the path for saving the exported frequency script.
Step 3 Click OK.
The frequency scripts file is exported.
----End
NOTE

Program comparison information: you can directly analyze and modify frequency information, and you
can also refresh the frequency by auto frequency optimization. You can choose Frequency Analysis >
Export Frequency S cript > Compared with Configuration.

11-60

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.6 Analyzing Neighbors


11.6.1 Background
The Nastar GSM supplies abundant neighbor relation check and modification method,
supplies to display the analysis result geographically, and exports neighbor relation as Huawei
facility script.
Ensure that the *.dbf file is imported before you analyze neighbors. The main functions of the
neighbor analysis are listed as follows:

Neighbors relation maintenance and automatic planning

Provides the maintenance function for the neighbor relation, such as displaying,
adding, deleting, or modifying neighbors.

Provides the automatic planning function for the neighbors with the neighbor
relations algorithm based on the accumulated experiences of Huawei. It helps users to
save a lot of time and effort.

Data comparing and restoring function

Provides the function for comparing project parameters, including comparison


between parameters before modification and parameters after modification,
comparison of project parameters between before and after modification neighbor
cell relations.

Provides the comparison between planned neighbors and configured neighbors.

11.6.2 Checking Unidirectional Neighbors


To check the unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Unidirectional Neighbors Check, as shown in Figure 11-62.
Figure 11-62 Check Unidirectional Neighbors menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-61

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

The unidirectional neighbor check result is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-63.


Figure 11-63 Unidirectional neighbor check result

Step 2 Right-click the result window to save the check result.


----End

11-62

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.6.3 Maintaining Relation of Neighbors


Displaying Neighbors
To display neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Neighbor Display, as shown in Figure 11-64.
Figure 11-64 Neighbor Analysis menu

Step 2 Click the Site View window to select a cell.


The current selected cell and its neighbors are marked in different colors (divided to
unidirectional neighbors and bidirectional neighbors), as shown in Figure 11-65.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-63

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-65 Neighbors relation effect

----End

Adding Bidirectional Neighbors


To add bidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Bidirectional Neighbors, as
shown in Figure 11-66.

11-64

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-66 Add Bidirectional Neighbors

Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation.
You can configure multiple cells as the bidirectional neighbors of the current cell by clicking
several times.
----End

Adding Unidirectional Neighbors


To add unidirectional neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Add Unidirectional Neighbors,
as shown in Figure 11-66.
Step 2 Click a cell in the Site View window to add the neighbor relation.
You can configure multiple cells as the unidirectional neighbors of the current cell by clicking
several times.
----End

Deleting Neighbors
To delete neighbors, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Delete Neighbors, as shown in
Figure 11-66.
Step 2 Click one or multiple cells to be deleted.
You can select several cells to delete the neighbors' relation with the current cell.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-65

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Saving Modified Neighbors


Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Save Modified Neighbors to save
the modification of the neighbor relation for the cell.

Exporting Neighbors Comparing Results


Exporting neighbors comparing results comprises the following parts:

Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors


Maintenance Result > Last Closed to compare the neighbor data with the latest closed
project.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors
Maintenance Result > Last Imported to compare the neighbor data with the latest
imported neighbor data.

Exporting Neighbors Comparing Script


For details about exporting neighbors comparing script, see section 11.6.9 "Exporting
Neighbors Adjusting Script."
NOTE

After the neighbor relation of a cell is added or deleted, the system prompts to save the neighbor relation
of this cell first, and then to continue with other network optimization operations.

11.6.4 Importing the Neighbor Relation


To import the neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbor Analysis > Import Neighbors File, as shown in Figure 11-67.
Figure 11-67 Import Neighbor File menu

11-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 Choose a submenu of Import Neighbors File based on a vendor.


The dialog box for selecting the corresponding file is displayed.
Step 3 Select the neighbor relation file of the manufacturer.
Step 4 Click Open.
If the configuration file of the manufacturer is in .xls format, c ontinue selecting the relevant
sheet of the file.
Step 5 Click OK to import the neighbor relation.
----End

11.6.5 Importing Neighbor Relation of the Standard Format


Analys is of the neighbor relation is based on the original .dbf file. The neighbor relation is
imported to the project with the .dbf file. If the neighbor relation changes, the original
neighbor relation also changes. If network optimization engineers want to save the optimized
neighbor relation, they can first save it to an .xls file. The saved neighbor relation can be used
for import when it is required.
The data formats are as follows:

Horizontal format
It is used to describe a cell with only one record of the neighbors. The number of fields is
alterable. The first field describes the cell, and the following fields describe the
neighbors. Each field describes a neighbor.

Vertical format
There are only two fields, but the records can be multiple. The import format and export
format must be consistent. It depends on you to choose a format.

Importing Horizontal Format


To import the neighbor relation of the horizontal format, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Horizontal, as
shown in Figure 11-68.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-67

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-68 Neighbor Analysis menu

11-68

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import window is displayed, as shown in
Figure 11-69.
Figure 11-69 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box

Step 2 Select the file of the neighbor relation in the horizontal format, and then click Open.
The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of
the neighbor file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in the list
box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, and then click OK.
----End
NOTE

The horizontal neighbor importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM
neighbor. Only when the two files match, you can finish importing successfully. For details, see section
11.6.6 "Exporting Neighbor Relation".

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-69

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Importing Vertical Format


To import the neighbor relation of vertical format, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format > Vertical, as
shown in Figure 11-68.
The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import window is displayed, as shown
in Figure 11-70.
Figure 11-70 Please choose upright adjacent relation file import dialog box

Step 2 Select the file of the neighbor relation in the vertical format, and then click Open.
The program automatically identifies and matches certain fields based on the column name of
the neighbor file. For the unmatched or faulty-matched fields, click the first column in the list
box, and select corresponding fields to be matched on the shortcut menu, click OK.
----End
NOTE

The vertical neighbor importing file must be the file horizontally exported from the Nastar GSM
neighbor. Only when the two files match, you can import the file successfully. For details, refer to
section 11.6.6 "Exporting Neighbor Relation".

11-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.6.6 Exporting Neighbor Relation


Exporting Neighbor Relation
To export the neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-71.
Figure 11-71 Export Neighbors menu

The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-72.


Figure 11-72 Export Neighbors dialog box

Step 2 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the Export Format group box.


Step 3 Select one or multiple items to be displayed.
Step 4 Click OK to export the neighbor relation table.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-71

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

If Horizontal is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table of horizontal
neighbor relation in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-73.

Figure 11-73 Table of horizontal neighbor relation in .xls format

If Vertical Export is selected in the Export Neighbors dialog box, the table of vertical
neighbor relation in .xls format is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-74.
Figure 11-74 Table of vertical neighbor relation in .xls format

----End

11-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.6.7 Clearing Cell Neighbor Relation


Clearing Configured Neighbor Relation
To clear the configured neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Config Neighbors, as shown in Figure 11-75.
Figure 11-75 Clear Config. Neighbors menu

A message indicating you to confirm the clearing operation is displayed, as shown in Figure
11-76.
Figure 11-76 Confirmation box

Step 2 Click Yes.


----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-73

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Clearing Planned Neighbor Relation


To clear the planned neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Clear Planned Neighbors, as shown in
Figure 11-77 Clear Planned Neighbors menu

A message indicating you to confirm the clearing operation is displayed, as show in


Figure 11-78 Confirmation box

Step 2 Click Yes


----End

11-74

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.6.8 Analyzing the Redundant Neighbors


Redundant neighbors exist when too many neighbors for a cell are available in a network, or
when the network topology has changed. Redundant neighbors result in resource waste.
Suspected redundant neighbors analysis lists all the suspected redundant neighbors and
displays these suspected redundant neighbors on a map.
To analyze redundant neighbor, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32) of the Mobility node on the
Trouble Shooting page.
The Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is displayed, as shown in
Figure 11-79.
Figure 11-79 Redundant Neighbor cell Analysis(BSC32) dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, set Date and Time. Or click Common date to use the default
common date set by the system.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-75

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.

Network Group: select cells by cell group.

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End
NOTE

The procedure of Redundant Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to Redundant


Neighboring Cell Analysis (BSC32).

11.6.9 Exporting Neighbors Adjusting Script


Exporting neighbors adjusting script contains the following parts:

Precondition

The local data downloaded and updated of neighbor information from the server
(download the configuration data to local).

The project parameter (for displaying the cell on map) imported.

The status of the Nastar GSM is online.

Comparison information
You can directly analyze and modify the relation information of neighbors (After the
project parameters are imported, you can adjust and modify the neighbor relation in a
map), this method should in the manual adjust mode.

Shows the neighbor relation by auto neighbor optimizat ion arithmetic, this method
should in the manual adjust mode.

Comparison Result
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors
Script > Last Closed to compare the neighbor script information with the latest
closed project.

Choose Neighbors Analysis > Neighbors Maintenance > Export Neighbors


Script > Compared with Configuration to compare the neighbor script information
with the latest imported neighbor script.

NOTE

You can perform the Exporting Neighbors Comparing S cript task only when the Nastar GSM is
online.

11-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.7 Analyzing CHR


11.7.1 Analyzing CHR Access
Background
Access analysis is one import part of CHR applied data, and it is a special module in the
Nastar GSM. According to the initial access type and finally access type, timing advance (TA)
can be cataloged, and then generates statistic charts. With the charts, you can further familiar
with the access in the network.

Procedures
To analyze CHR access, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click CHR Access Analysis under the CHR Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting
pane on workspace.
The Access Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-80.
Figure 11-80 Access Analysis

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-77

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 Select an object from the object list.


You can select only one object. The default selection is the first cell under the first node of
BSC. If you do not select one, a message is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-81.
Figure 11-81 Error dialog box

Step 3 Click the Time Range tab.


Figure 11-82 shows an access analysis time range tab page.
Figure 11-82 Access Analysis Time Range tab page

Step 4 Set Date.

11-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

The default value is the current system time. Select End Time.
The Begin Time is the same as the End Time.
Step 5 Set Time.
Select a Begin Time.
Step 6 Set Time Cycle.
Select Statistic Cycle from the drop-down list. The drop-down list comprises two values, 15
and 60.
Step 7 Click OK.
The .xls report of the access analysis is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-83.
----End
Figure 11-83 Access analysis report

NOTE

The default tab page of access interface is query object tab page.
In Time setting, En d Time is grayed.
End Time changes with Begin Time and Time Cycle, End Time is Begin Time plus Time Cycle.
The analysis of CHR only supports V9R3 and V9R8 data.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-79

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.7.2 Analyzing CHR Coverage


Background
Analyzing the data coverage is a special module of the optimizing network. Through analysis
of the data coverage, various measurement in formations are displayed. According to the
selected time range and object, you can export related statistic data and charts. Therefore, it is
convenient for you to analyze the cover problems.

Procedures
To analyze CHR coverage, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click CHR Cover Analysis under CHR Analysis node in Trouble Shooting pane on
workspace.
The CHR Cover Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-84.
Figure 11-84 CHR Coverage Analysis

Step 2 Select an object that requires query from the object list.

11-80

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

You can select one at most.


Step 3 Click the Time Range tab page, as shown in Figure 11-85.
Figure 11-85 Cover Analysis Date Range tab page

For details about the time set, see "11.7.1 Step 4" to "11.7.1 Step 6".
Step 4 Click OK.
Perform the task.
The .xls report of coverage analysis is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-86.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-81

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-86 Cover Analysis report

----End

Report Description
The report mainly includes the following parts:

Upper part of the window


Display the basic information, including the query time, BSC name, cell name, TRX
number, TRX drop-down list, TRX selection button. The drop-down list is used to query
some cells and to display the detailed statistics about the TRX coverage.

Lower part of the window


It is composed of TA measurement data related to the analysis chart and TA-Signal
Intensity-Quality related analysis chart.
TA measure data related analys is chart
Abscissa of TA: TA original field is from 0 to 255, contains 256 TA fields.
The field of PLS processed is described, as shown in Table 11-6.

11-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Table 11-6 TA field abscissa display


TA Field Abscissa Value

TA Field Real Value

1, 2, 3, 4

1, 2, 3, 4

5 - 10

11

11 - 20

21

21 - 40

41

41 - 63

64

greater than or equal to 64

Y-axis on the left: number of the measure report, which renders in red column graph.

Y-axis on the left: average MOS, ranging from 0 to 5, which renders in blue fold line.
TA-Signal Intensity-Quality related analysis chart
Abscissa TA: see previous sub item list "TA measure data related analysis chart."
Y-axis on the left: level intens ity, ranging from 0 to 63. RXLU render in red column
graph, RXLD render in yellow column graph.
Y-axis on the right: level quality, ranging from 0 to 7, RXQU render in blue convert
line, RXQD render in green convert line.

NOTE

By way of selecting different TRX from the TRX drop -down list or TRX forward and reverse, the
related analysis chart of TA measure data and the related analysis chart of TA-Signal Intensity-Quality is
updated.

11.7.3 Analyzing CHR Call Drop


Background
Call drop analys is is one important part of the CHR data applied. You can perform call drop
analys is, according to the input time range and selected call release reason type.
Analyzing CHR call drop contains the following parts:

04 (2008-12-10)

Analyzing the mass call history record and key information about each record with
subsequent handle tools

Helping network operators optimize the network and monitor the network performance

Separating and locating the network problem

Complaining handle

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-83

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Process
To analyze CHR call drop, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click CHR Call Drop Analysis under the CHR Analysis node in the Trouble
Shooting pane on workspace.
The CHR Call Drop Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-87.
Figure 11-87 Call Drop Analysis

Step 2 Set Begin Time and End Time in the time setting area, the maximal span of time is one day.
Step 3 Select call drop type which need analyze.
Step 4 Select version.
Step 5 Set Net Element.
There are BSC, Cell, MS sheet. For details about the setting of BSC, Cell and MS, see section
"11.7.4 Step 3"of 11.7.4 "Analyzing CHR Voice."
Step 6 Click OK.
Perform the call drop analys is task.
The report is generated, as shown in Figure 11-88.

11-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-88 Call drop report

----End

Report Description
The report mainly includes the following parts:

Upper part of the window

Statistics on the left: comprises the BSC, Cell, MS, tab pages.
Table 11-7 shows the details of the statistic sheet.

Table 11-7 Analysis Result analysis sheet


Object

Statistic
Manner

Description

BSC

TOP
10/BSC

Displaying the total call drop number of each BSC and the
number of TOP 10 cell call drop

Cell

Cell

Displaying the number of selected cell call drops in a


descending order

Cell Group

The first grade directory is cell groups and their number of


call drop.
The second grade directory is cell under the first cell group,
sorting by number of call drop descend.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-85

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Object

Statistic
Manner

Description

MS

Ms TOP
10/BSC

Displaying the total call drop number of each BSC and the
number of TOP 10 MS call drop

MS Group

The first grade directory is MS groups and their number of


call drop.
The second grade directory is MS under the first MS group,
sorting by number of call drop descend.

NOTE

Each output result is determined by the related object of the input interface, if none is selected, there is
no data to be exported. For example, the output of the BSC is determined by the BSC sheet, if no BSC is
selected, there is no data to be exported.

Measurement sheet on the left: displays each list information, including the BCCH,
BISC, TA, Up Level, Down Level, Up Quality, and Down Quality.

Statistics sheet on the right: call drop reason tree, its details are shown in Table 11-8.

Table 11-8 Analysis result call drop reason tree


Object

Statistic
Manner

Description

BSC

TOP 10/BSC

Displays first row BSC call drop operation reason tree.

Cell

Cell

Displays first row Cell call drop operation reason tree.

Cell Group

Displays first row Cell Group call drop operation reason


tree.

Ms TOP
10/BSC

Displays first row MS call drop operation reason tree.

MS Group

Displays first row MS Group call drop operation reason


tree.

MS

Measurement sheet on the right: measure information graph.


Abscissa: there are six types of measurement reports, which are shown in black
vertical line.
Y-axis on the left: level - up curve, shown in blue; down curve, shown in green.
Y-axis on the right: level quality - up curve, show in blue; down curve, show in green.

Lower part of the window


This sheet displays the result of the above window and set condition, also displays the
printed node information for the call drop.
The details about the records refresh as the left above object frame and the right above
operation tree frame.

11-86

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.7.4 Analyzing CHR Voice


Background
The voice analysis function is an import part of the CHR data application. The voice analysis
is provided by a special module in the GENEX Nastar GSM. The analyzing CHR voice can
be cataloged as call path resource, end information, and measurement information, and get the
reasons of voice problems. You can conveniently know the further voice analysis.

Procedures
To analyze CHR voice, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click CHR Voice Analysis under the CHR Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting
pane on workspace.
The CHR Voice Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-89.
Figure 11-89 CHR Voice Analysis

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-87

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 Select the End Date, Begin Time and Statistic Cycle in Time Range. The default of the
Statistic Cycle is 60 minutes, Or you can select other statistic cycle.
Step 3 Click the Network Element Object tab page.
The NetProperty of CHR Voice Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-90.
Figure 11-90 The NetProperty CHR Voice Analysis

Select a data version from the drop-down list, and this version BSCs display in Network
Element Object.
Step 4 Select the type of abnormal voice, "Single Path" or "Short Call".
Step 5 Set the cell, MS or route resource in Network Element Object frame.

11-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Table 11-9 describes the items in the Network Element Object dialog box.
Table 11-9 Network Element Object
Object

Statistic
Manner

Description

Cell

TOP
10/BSC

Sort 10 cells of each BSC voice number in descending


format. You can select more than one BSCs.

Cell

Display the number of voice for selected cells. You can


select all cells in one BSC . The cell can realize the query
through blur search., You can select one BSC at most.

Cell Group

Display the number of voice for selected cell groups. You


can select more than one groups.

Ms TOP
10/BSC

According to the number of each BSC voice, sorts 10


MS. You can select one BSC at most.

MS Group

Display the number of selected MS group voice. You can


select more than one MS groups. For details about the
MS Group, see section 5.6.3 "Setting Cell Groups."

TOP50/BSC

Display TOP50 result of one BSC

MS

Route
Resource

Select one BSC at most


Route resource choose resource object. You can choose
only one route resource.

Choose MS Group under the MS group box.


Click MS Group Setting.
The MS Group setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-91.
Figure 11-91 MS Group setting

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-89

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Click New.
The MS Edit dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-92. You can set the
MSGroup Name and the Ms Terminal No value.

Figure 11-92 MS Edit

Click Add.
Add a MS group, the added MS groups are displayed in the Ms Terminal No frame. You
can also click Batch Import to import an .xls file.
You can delete the unreasonable Ms Terminal No by clicking Delete.
For details about the other functions of MS Group Setting, see section 5.6.3 "Setting Cell
Groups."

Step 6 Click OK in the Voice Analysis dialog box.


Perform the task,
The related result is generated.

11-90

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems


NOTE

In Date Setting, you can only set one day, in other words, the Begin Date equals to the End Date. The
Begin Date is grayed. You are allowed to set the End Date, and the Begin Date will be changed as the
End Date modified.
You can set one or more objects for Cell, MS or path resource in Network Element Object. You
should set one object at least.

----End

11.8 Analyzing the TRX Performance


11.8.1 Background
Perform the TRX performance measurement in the full speed and the half speed, the
measurement performance analysis consists of the following two analysis tasks:

Measurement report analysis


TRX/quality/TA/link balance analysis

The sum of measurement report is all of the TRX measurement reports according to the TA
call distribution.
The TRX measurement performance comprises the following parts:

Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC32)

Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analys is (BSC32)


Full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis (BSC6000)

Half rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analys is (BSC6000)

Through statistic, the sum of measurement reports according to TA call distribution is similar
with the full rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis. You can take the amounts of full
rate TRX level/quality/TA/link balance analysis report as standard. The amount of
measurement report with half rate is not correct of the primary arithmetic.

11.8.2 Analyzing the Measurement Report


Generating the TRX Report
To generate the measurement report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Measurement Report Analysis, as shown in Figure 11-93.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-91

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-93 Measurement Report Analysis command

11-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

The Measurement Report Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-94.
Figure 11-94 Measurement Report Analysis dialog box

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-93

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Table 11-10 describes the items in the Time and Object Setting tab page in the
Measurement Report Analysis dialog box.
Table 11-10 Description of Time and Object Setting tab page
Item

Description

File Output

Save path

Time Setting

Start date

Set the begin time of a query.

End date

Set the end time of a query.

Busy hour

Set one hour of a day.

Full Rate

Query by full rate.

Half Rate

Query by half rate.

BSC

Lists the objects selected by BSC.

Cell

Lists the objects selected by cell.

Cell group

Lists the objects selected by cell group.

Object

Click
to select a path for saving
the measurement report.

Step 2 Select the path for saving the measurement report.


Step 3 Set the date range, and the period in each day (for example, from 0 to 24) on the Time and
Object Setting tab page.
Step 4 Select objects of BSC, of Cell, or of Cell Group. And select objects from the list below
Object.
Step 5 Click the Default Setting tab page in the Measurement Report Analysis dialog box.
You can change the setting on the Default Setting tab page, or just leave it as the default.
Step 6 Click OK.
The carrier analysis report is generated, as shown in Figure 11-95.

11-94

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-95 CarrierAnalyReport

----End

Introduction to the Measurement Report


The measurement report mainly includes the following sheets:

BSC measurement data analys is


You can use statistic table to show BSC result.
The related BSC index contains the following parts:

Full Rate Uplink Quality%

Full Rate Uplink Rexlev%

Full Rate Downlink Quality%

Full Rate Downlink Rexlev%

TA Distribution%

Path Balance%

BSC measurement data chart


You can use statistic chart to show BSC result, the related BSC index contains the
following parts:

04 (2008-12-10)

Full Rate Uplink Quality%

Full Rate Uplink Rexlev%

Full Rate Downlink Quality%

Full Rate Downlink Rexlev%

TA Distribution%

Path Balance%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-95

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Problematic Carrier Diagram


The diagram lists original index concerning the problematic carriers, and generates the
related problem causing and settling methods.

Original Data of Problematic


The sheet lists all the original records concerning the problematic carriers in the above
chart.

11.8.3 Analyzing the TRX Level /Qual./TA/Link Balance


The TRX level/Qual./TA/link balance analysis is performed to analyze measurement-related
performance indicators.
To analyze the Full Rate TRX level /Qual./TA/link balance(BSC32), perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Double-click Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) of the TRX
Performance Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page.
The Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32) dialog box is
displayed, as shown in Figure 11-96.

11-96

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-96 Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis(BSC32) dialog box

Step 2 On the Time Range tab page, perform the following settings:

In the Date area, set Begin date and End date. Or click Common date to use the
default common date set by the system.
In the Time area, you can select Whole day or Busy hour. If you select Busy hour, you
can click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time.

A maximum of three busy time ranges can be specified.


Step 3 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.


Network Group: select cells by cell group.

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 5 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-97

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

NOTE

Click Multi-View Setting during modifying the task, the Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog
box is displayed. The Multi-View and Multi-Cell Setting dialog box can appoint the index item of all
the multi-view windows.
The setting of Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC6000), Half Rate TRX
Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis (BSC32), and Half Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance
Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to that of Full Rate TRX Level-Qual.-TA-Link Balance Analysis
(BSC32).

11.9 Analyzing Antenna & Feeder


11.9.1 Background
The arithmetic of antenna & feeder problem location mainly applied in the following
conditions:

When you create, move or optimize the network, you may reinstall the antenna & feeder
system.

Adjusting the existed antenna & feeder system.

The antenna & feeder problem orientation and judgment comprise the following parts:

The sending and receiving antennas of two cells are different


You can know the two cells whose sending and receiving antennas are different.

One cell sending and receiving antenna is diversity


You can know the TRX which the sending and receiving antenna is diversity.

One cell receiving antenna is diversity


You can know the TRX which the receiving antenna is diversity.

11.9.2 Procedures
To analyze antenna & feeder repot, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Antenna & Feeder Analysis.
Alternatively, you can double-click Antenna & Feeder Analysis in the Network Monitor
pane on workspace window.
The Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-97.

11-98

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-97 Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box

Table 11-11 describes the items in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box.
Table 11-11 Description of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
Item

Description

File Output

Click
to select a save path for antenna & feeder report. Or you can
use the default directory.

Data

Select the Start Time and End Time. You can choose the Common
Period.
NOTE
The Common Period can change in Analysis Setting of Workspace on the left pane,
as shown in Figure 11-98.

Busy Time

The default choice is All Day.


If choose Busy Time, you can click Setting to change the value of busy
time. You can choose three busy times at most.
You can also choose the Other, set the Start Time and End Time.
NOTE
The dialog box of S etting is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-99.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-99

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-98 Analysis Setting menu

Figure 11-99 Setting dialog box

Step 2 Set all parameters according to the Table 11-11.


Choose Net Element tab page.

11-100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

A network element dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-100.


Figure 11-100 Net Element tab page of the Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box

Step 3 Choose the Element or Element Group that needs to analyze from the BSC list. The default
BSC choice is none.
When Element Group is chosen, you can click Manager CellGroup to manage the cell
group. For details about how to set the cell groups, see section 10.2.2 "Generating a Daily
Report."
Step 4 Click Analysis Parameters tab page.
The Analysis Parameters tab page of antenna & feeder analysis dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 11-101.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-101

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-101 Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box

Table 11-12 describes the items in Analysis Parameters tab page of Antenna & Feeder
Analysis dialog box.
Table 11-12 Description of Analysis Parameters tab page in Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog
box
Item

Description

Analys is
Mode

There are three arithmetic modes.

Parameters

Arithmetic1 is MainDiversity Arithmetic Analys is. When it is chosen,


the DoorLimit1 and AcceptLimit are enabled. The nutterly1 and
nutterly2 are disabled.

Arithmetic2 is OutCell Handover Analys is. When it is chosen, the


DoorLimit1, AcceptLimit, nutterly1 and nutterly2 are enabled all.

Arithmetic3 is Arithmetic1 and Arithmetic2. When it is chosen, the


DoorLimit1, AcceptLimit, nutterly1 and nutterly2 are enabled all.

DoorLimit1: for judging the difference value of main diversity door


limit. Its default value is 8dBm, ranging from 1 to 65535.

AcceptLimit: for illuminating the difference absolute value of other


TRXs and server cells, which within the range of AcceptLimit is
receivable. Its default value is 2dB, range from 1 to 65535.
nutterly1: for judging which request degrees face and tangent direction
less is unreasonable. Its default value is 0, range from 0 to 65535.

11-102

nutterly2: for judging which request degrees back and tangent direction
less is unreasonable. Its default value is 10, range from 0 to 65535.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 5 Set all parameters according to Table 11-12. Click OK in Analysis Parameters tab page of
Antenna & Feeder Analysis dialog box
The antenna & feeder analysis report is generated.
----End

11.10 Analyzing Auto Frequency Optimize


11.10.1 Background
The Nastar GSM can process the uplink ARFCNS scan data of network elements, and display
the result in an intuitive manner. You can conveniently judge whether interference exists on
the network and choose the ARFCNS effectively.

11.10.2 Procedures
To analyze the uplink interference(BSC32), perform as following steps:
Step 1 Choose the Workspace > Trouble Shooting > TRX Performance Analysis > Uplink
Interference Analysis (BSC32), as shown in Figure 11-102.
Figure 11-102 Trouble Shooting menu

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-103

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Double-click the Uplink Interference Analys is (BSC32).


The UL Interference Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-103.
Figure 11-103 UL Interference Analysis dialog box

Table 11-13 describes the items in Time Range tab page of the UL Interference Analysis
dialog box.
Table 11-13 Description of the Time Range tab page in UL Interference Analysis dialog box

11-104

Item

Description

Data

Select the Begin data and End data. Or you can choose the Common
date

Time

Default time is Whole day. Or you can choose the Busy hour, and
Modify busy hour enabled

Task
Description

Describes the task

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 2 Choose Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box,
The Objects dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-104.
Figure 11-104 Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box

Step 3 Object Type default choice is Network Element. Select the object from the Objects list.
You can only select one object.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-105

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 4 Click OK.


An uplink interference frequency setting dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-105.
Figure 11-105 Uplink interference frequency setting dialog box

Step 5 Set the frequency range, you can set the most three ranges and the input frequency numbers
should be less than 96,
Step 6 Click OK in the Queried Objects tab page of the UL Interference Analysis dialog box.
The uplink disturb analys is report is generated.
----End
NOTE

The performance of the Uplink Interference Analysis (BSC6000) is similar to the Uplink Interference
Analysis (BSC32).
If the Time Range setting is unreasonable, click OK, a dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure
11-106. The Uplink Interference Analysis ARFCNS Setting dialog box displays until the Time Range
setting turns reasonable.

Figure 11-106 There is no data

11-106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

11.11 Analyzing Weak Coverage and Over Coverage


11.11.1 Background
Being pre-processed by PLS, the original CHR data of BSC6000 which is V9R8CO1BO48 or
a later version is transferred to the Nastar GSM server. The Nastar collects statistics on TRX
coverage data, exports corresponding statistics and graphics, and helps you to analyze the
problems related to network coverage.

11.11.2 Procedures
To analyze weak coverage and over coverage, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Less cover and Over cover analysis in the workspace.
The Less cover and Over cover analysis dialog box is displayed. Click the Time and
Object Setting tab.
The Time and Object Setting tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-107.
Figure 11-107 Time and Object Setting tab page

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-107

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Step 2 Enter the save path of the analysis report in the Save Path field or click
path for saving the report.

to select a

Step 3 Set the end date and busy time in the Time Setting area.

The start date corresponds to the end date. When the end date is entered, the start date is
automatically updated.

You can set only start date in Busy hour. By default, end time is set to the value of start time plus 1.

Step 4 Select the NEs to be analyzed in the Select Object area.


Step 5 Click the Default Setting tab in the Less cover and Over cover dialog box.
The Default Setting tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-108.
Figure 11-108 Default Setting tab page

11-108

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Step 6 Enter the downlink level, TA, and number of cell measurement reports in the Less Cover
area.
This part takes the values displayed in Figure 11-108 as an example to describe the settings of Less
Cover. When more than 30 percentage of reports are those in which the downlink level is less than -90
dbm and TA is greater than 2, the coverage is defined as weak coverage.

Step 7 Enter the downlink level, TA, and number of cell measurement reports in the Less Cover
area.
This part takes the values displayed in Figure 11-108 as an example to describe the settings of Over
Cover. When more than 20 percentage of reports are those in which the downlink lever is less than -80
dbm and TA is smaller than 2, the coverage is defined as over coverage.

Step 8 Click OK.


An analysis report is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-109. To view the results, click Over
Cover Analysis or Less Cover Analysis.
Figure 11-109 Analysis results

----End

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-109

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Proble ms

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11.12 Checking for TRX Hidden Fault


11.12.1 Background
Hidden faults are difficult to locate. Hidden faults related to TRXs are the most common ones
and usually cause the entire cell to be in abnormal operation state.

11.12.2 Procedures of TRX Hidden Fault Check


To check for hidden faults related to TRXs, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Carrier Fault jerque Analysis in the workspace. The
Carrier Fault jerque Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-110.

11-110

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

Figure 11-110 Carrier Fault jerque Analysis dialog box

Step 2 Open the Time and Object Setting tab page. Enter the save path in the File Output area. Set
the start date, end date, start time, and end time in the Time Setting area and select the NEs to
be analyzed in the Select Object area.
Step 3 Open the Quality-Balance-TA tab page shown in Figure 11-111. Set the related parameters
as required.

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-111

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

Figure 11-111 Quality-Balance-TA tab page

11-112

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

You can set the related parameters on the tab page only after you select Build Report.

This part takes the values shown in Figure 11-111 as an example to describe the settings of
Uplink/Downlink Quality Analysis. A report is generated when 90 % of the reports are those in
which the uplink quality level is from 5 to 7. Similarly, another report is generated when 90% of the
reports are those in which the downlink quality level is from 5 to 7.

For details about the settings of other parameters, see the description of Uplink/Downlink Quality
Analysis.

Step 4 Click OK to start the analysis.


The TRX performance analysis report is an .xls file and contains multiple sheets to export different
reports.

Step 5 Repeat Step 1 and Step 2. Open the Assignment-Link tab page shown in Figure 11-112 and
set the related parameters as required.
Figure 11-112 Assignment-Link tab page

04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

11-113

11 Further Locating Netwo rk Problems

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

You can set the related parameters on the tab page only after you select Build Report.

This part takes the values shown in Figure 11-112 as an example to describe the settings of Radio
Link/Call Duration Abnormal Analysis. A report is generated when the following conditions are
met:

The abnormal times of wireless link abnormality per minute is greater than 0.3.

The average call duration is smaller than 15 seconds.

The number of reports whose uplink or downlink quality level is from 5 to 7 is less than 3% of the
total number of reports.

For details about the settings of other parameters, see the description of Radio Link/Call Duration
Abnormal Analysis.

Step 6 Click OK to start the analysis.


The TRX performance analysis report is an .xls file and contains multiple sheets to export different
reports.

----End

11-114

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

12

Predicting Network Trend

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Title

Description

12.1 Network Expansion


Report

The background and procedure for generating the network


expansion report

12.2 Analyzing Report of LAC


Capacity

The background and procedure for generating the LAC


analys is report

12.3 Analyzing the Radio


Resource Utility Ratio

The cell capability analysis, extra-busy cell analysis,


extra-idle cell analys is, and busy-hour traffic analysis

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

12.1 Network Expansion Report


12.1.1 Background
The Nastar GSM supports all radio resource utility ratio on one local network. By comparing
resource configuration, available network resource, network real traffic , and network
designing capacity status, you can obtain the resource utility ratio of network.
The network expansion report provides the following functions:

Calculating the number of required TRX cell, according to the designed target network
resource utility ratio

Calculating the number of required TRX cell which needs enlarge capacity at cell grade

Supporting open half rate network expansion

12.1.2 Procedure
To generate a network expansion report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > Network Expansion Report, as shown in Figure 12-1.

12-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Figure 12-1 Network Expansion Report command

Alternatively, you can double-click Network Expansion Report in the Network Trend pane
on workspace window.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

The Network Expansion Report dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-2.
Figure 12-2 Network Expansion Report dialog box

Step 2 Set the start date and end date in the Date Setting area of the Parameter Setting tab page.
Step 3 Set other parameters in the Settings area of the Parameter Setting tab page.
Table 12-1 describes the Settings area in the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network
Expansion Report dialog box.
Table 12-1 Settings of the Parameter Setting tab page in the Network Expansion Report dialog
box

12-4

Item

Description

BH traffic stat. mode

Set the Statistic mode for traffic measurement during


busy hours.

Capa_cell expansion figure (%)

Refers to the figure for capability cell expansion.

Cov_cell expansion figure (%)

Refers to the figure for coverage cell expansion.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Item

Description

TCH margin

Refers to the margin of traffic channels.

TCHs per TRX

Refers to the number of TCH channels per TRX.

Capa_cell definition

Refers to the definition of the capability cell.

Erl_B GOS (%)

Display mode

Displays in .xls report or OWC control.

Step 4 Click the Query Object tab page.


The Query Object tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-3.
Figure 12-3 Query Object tab page of the Network Expansion Report dialog box

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Step 5 Specify Object Type on the Query Object tab page.

If BSC is selected, the query objects are listed by BSC.

If Cell Group is selected, the query objects are listed by cell group.

Step 6 Select objects from the object list.


Step 7 Click OK.

If .xls is set as display mode, the network expansion report is generated, as shown in
Figure 12-4.

Figure 12-4 Network Expansion Report

12-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

If OWC is set as display mode, the network expansion report is generated, as shown in
Figure 12-5.

Figure 12-5 Network Expansion Report in OWC mode

----End

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

12.2 Analyzing Report of LAC Capacity


12.2.1 Background
According to the .xls format file which generated by the LAC capacity analysis, the function
contains the following parts:

Supply a better monitoring method, you can get the warning information before the call
capacity of network available.

You can enhance the network capacity during the primary time of the network planning.

12.2.2 Generating an LAC Capacity Analysis Report


To generate an LAC capacity analysis report, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Choose Analysis Reports > LAC Capacity Analysis, as shown in Figure 12-6.
Figure 12-6 LAC Capacity Analysis Report command

12-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Alternatively, you can double-click LAC Capacity Analysis in the Network Trend pane on
workspace window.
The LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-7.
Figure 12-7 LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box

Table 12-2 describes the items in the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box.
Table 12-2 Description of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box
Item

Description

Path

Click
to select a path for saving LAC Capacity Analysis report. Or
you can use the default directory.

LAC

Select an object from the LAC list.

Data Select

Select the start date and end date in Begin Date and End Date fields.
Type a value in the Statistic Cycle (days) field. The value must be an
integer within the range from 1 to 31.
NOTE
If the integer is beyond the range listed previously, the system prompts you to enter a
valid value.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Item

Description
Select All-Day to generate a report of whole day.

Select Busy Hour to generate a report for busy-hour traffic.


Click Change Busy Hour to view the Busy Hour Setting dialog box, and
set the busy hour.

Step 2 Set all parameters according to Table 12-2.


Step 3 Click the Param Setting tab page.
The Param Setting tab page of an LAC Capac ity Analys is dialog box is displayed, as shown
in Figure 12-8.
Figure 12-8 Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box

12-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Table 12-3 describes the items in the Param Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis
dialog box.
Table 12-3 Describes the items in the Parameters Setting tab page of the LAC Capacity Analysis
dialog box
Item
Paging
Mechanism

Description
Primary paging
success rate

Enter a value in the Primary paging success rate


field

Combination
efficiency Mmax

The default value is 3.2, you can modify it

Paging Mechanism
(paging setting: 1 to 3)

The range of Paging Mechanism is 1 to 3, and its


option is temporary mobile station identity
(TMSI), international mobile station identity
(IMSI), and NULL
NOTE
The option is defined in advance.

Load
Parameter

Paging overload

The Load Parameter is optional. The value of


Paging overload is 60, you can modify it

PCH overloads

The value of PCH overloads is 0, you can modify


it

Step 4 Set all parameters according to Table 12-3, and then click OK in the Param Setting tab page
of the LAC Capacity Analysis dialog box.
An LAC Capacity Analysis report is generated, as shown in Figure 12-9.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Figure 12-9 LAC Capacity report

----End

12.2.3 Introduction to the LAC Capacity Analysis Report


The LAC capacity analys is report mainly includes the following sheets:

Lac optimization

Mainly contains Lac capacity analyzing result.

Advice, according to the result by arithmetic, putting forward the related advice.

TOP 10 overload cells. According to the cell call load, the TOP 10 overload cells are
displayed. When N is less than 10, the N overload cells are displayed. When the
number of the overload cells N is 0, the TOP 10 overload cells sheet is not displayed.

Lac call capacity, displays all call capacity of the whole Lac.

Lac redundancy capacity, when overload does not exist or no data is within the
selected time range, only the Lac redundancy sheet is generated and the capacity
available is displayed.
Readme

12-12

Describes the related guidelines.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

12.3 Analyzing the Radio Resource Utility Ratio


12.3.1 Background
The wireless resource utility ratio analysis contains the c ell capability analysis, extra-busy cell
analys is, extra-idle cell analys is, and busy-hour traffic analysis.
The wireless resource utility ratio mainly includes the following functions:

Cell capacity analys is


This function is for analyzing the system busy time and real-time of each cell in some
day, comparing the KPI and co-selecting the net KPI to do statistic of the system
busy-hour. This function can do statistic of the sum of the traffic about 24 hours in one
seven days for a cell, and can display with different colors in a sheet. As a result, you are
convenient to query and compare the result.

Extra-busy cell analysis


This function is for analyzing the extra-busy cells, which meet with the parameters set by
user.

Extra-idle cell analysis


This function is for analyzing the extra-idle cells, which meet with the parameters set by
user.

Busy-hour traffic analysis


This function is for exporting the fact busy hour distribution condition for each cell, and
busy time KPI for each day.

12.3.2 Analyzing the Daily Capability of a Cell


This function is performed to analyze the traffic volume in a week for a cell or for all the cells,
and to display the traffic volume in different colors to facilitate your viewing and comparison.
To analyze the daily capability of a cell, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Daily Cell Capability Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio
Analysis node in the Trouble Shooting pane.
The Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-10.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Figure 12-10 Daily Cell Capability Analysis dialog box

Step 2 In the Items tab page, select an appropriate Gos value from the Select One Item list.
Step 3 In the Time Range tab page, select an end date from the End Date drop-down list, you can
click Modify busy hour to specify the busy time.
Step 4 In the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.

Network Group: select cells by cell group.

Step 5 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
You can select a maximum of eight cells. By default, the system queries all the cells.
Step 6 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

12-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend


NOTE

In the Time Range tab page, you cannot set Begin Date and Busy Time, or query the data of the whole
day.

12.3.3 Analyzing the Extra Busy Cells


To analyze the extra busy cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Extra Busy Cell Analysis of the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis
node on the Trouble Shooting page.
The Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-11.
Figure 12-11 Extra Busy Cell Analysis dialog box

Step 2 Set Begin Date and End Date on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to use
the default common date set by the system.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.

Network Group: select cells by cell group.

Step 5 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 6 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

12.3.4 Analyzing the Extra Idle Cells


To analyze the extra idle cells, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Extra Idle Cell Analysis under the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio Analysis
node on the Trouble Shooting page.
The Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-12.
Figure 12-12 Extra Idle Cell Analysis dialog box

12-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Step 2 Set Begin Date, End Date, and Time on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to
use the default common date set by the system.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour.
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.

Network Group: select cells by cell group.

Step 5 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 6 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

12.3.5 Analyzing the Cell Traffic in Rush Hours


To analyze the cell traffic in rush hours, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Double-click Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat under the Wireless Resource Utility Ratio
Analysis node on the Trouble Shooting page.
The Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 12-13.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

12-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

12 Predicting Net work Trend

Figure 12-13 Cell Traffic Rush Hour Stat dialog box

Step 2 Set Begin Date, End Date, and Time on the Time Range tab page, or click Common date to
use the default common date set by the system.
Step 3 On the Time Range tab page, select Whole day or Busy hour.
Step 4 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the object type.

Network Element: select cells by cell.

Network Group: select cells by cell group.

Step 5 On the Queried Objects tab page, select the objects to be queried.
Step 6 Click OK.
The query result is generated in a sheet.
----End

12-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13

FAQ

About This Chapter


The following table lists the contents of this chapter.
Section

Describes

13.1 Installing Notice

Introduction to the notice of installation

13.2 Problems of Running


Program

Introduction to the problems that you will contact at


running time, and how to solve

13.3 Problems of Importing


Data

Introduction to the problems that you will contact when


importing data, and how to solve the problems

13.4 Function

Introduction to the problems of function

13.5 Others

Introduction to other problems

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.1 Installing Notice


13.1.1 MSDE is Recommended in the Stand-alone Version
MSDE is recommended in stand-alone version, but MSDE is not recommended in SQL
Server.
The SQL Server requires higher system configuration and occupies more system resources
than the MSDE. Huawei recommends that you install the MSDE rather than the SQL Server,
because the MSDE is sufficient for the stand-alone version.

13.1.2 Problem Caused by Uninstalling the Earlier-Version Nastar


Question
If you have installed both the Nastar GSM2.4 and the Nastar GSM of the earlier-versions, the
MapX component fails to work properly after you uninstall the Nastar GSM of the
earlier-version; thus causes many unexpected problems.

Answer
Switching between versions can solve this problem.
To solve this problem, performing the following steps:
Step 1 Open Add or Delete Programs on the Control Panel.
Step 2 Remove the program GENEX Nastar GSM (earlier-versions and the latest versions) from
the Add or Delete Programs window.
Step 3 Remove the program GENEX Shared.
Step 4 Reinstall the Nastar GSM (earlier-version).
Step 5 Uninstall the Nastar GSM (earlier-version) complete.
Step 6 Re-install the Nastar GSM (the latest version).
The system prompts you to install GENEX Shared components package (including MapX,
Teechart, OWC, MDAC2.7, and Sentinel Lock Driver), and then you need reinstall the
GENEX Shared according to the clew.
----End

13-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.2 Problems of Running Program


13.2.1 Problems Caused by Expired License
Question 1
My dongle has expired. How can I update it?

Answer
Update the license to solve this problem, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 13-1.
Figure 13-1 License Error dialog box

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-3

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Step 2 Click Update.


The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-2.
Figure 13-2 Open dialog box

Step 3 Select the license file, and then click Open.


Step 4 Click OK to complete copying the license.
Step 5 Restart the GENEX Nastar GSM.
----End

Question 2
How to obtain a software license online?

Answer
If you are Huawei internal users, you can use the Nastar through obtaining the software
license. If you are general users, you need install the network card before obtaining the license,
one license is related to only one computer.

13-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

To obtain the software license online, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Start the Nastar GSM main program.
The License information dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-3.
Figure 13-3 License information

Step 2 Send an ESN code to Huawei.


After obtaining the ESN code, Huawei sends the license file to you.
Step 3 Click Update in the License Error dialog box, as shown in Figure 13-1.
Step 4 Select the license obtained from Huawei.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-5

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.2.2 Why Cannot the Program Be Correctly Started After the


Installation of the Nastar GSM2.4 Hard Dongle Version?
Question
The Nastar GSM2.4 hard dongle version is installed and a new hard dongle is plugged in the
parallel port. When starting the program, the system gives a message that the hard dongle is
not found yet, and the start fails.

Answer
The problem is caused by the confliction between the latest version and the old one.
To handle this problem, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Install the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.4.
Step 2 On Control Panel, remove the installed the Nastar GSM2.4.
Step 3 Restart your system.
Step 4 Reinstall the latest version of the Nastar GSM2.4.
----End

13.2.3 Why Cannot the MSDE Be Correctly Installed?


Question
Why cannot the MSDE be installed correctly?

Answer
Table 13-1 shows the process procedure of the MSDE.
Table 13-1 Process procedure

An MSDE instance is installed


with the same name as the one
you have installed before

In this case, perform the following steps:


2.

Uninstall the MSDE

3.

Delete all instance files in the SQL Server folder


(C:\Program Files\Microsoft SQL Server\)
Reinstall the MSDE

4.
An MSDE instance is not
installed with the same name as
the one you have installed
before

13-6

You can infer that the problem may be caused by the


confliction between the MSDE and the SQL Server.
Therefore you can uninstall the SQL Server firstly, and
then reinstall the MSDE

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.3 Problems of Importing Data


13.3.1 How to Upgrade Performance Statistics Query Task in the
Old Database After the Installation of the Latest Version?
Question
After you install a new Nastar GSM version, the main program has been upgraded
successfully. If the Nastar GSM is connected to the old database, the performance statistics
query task, however, is still old. How to update the performance statistics query task of the
old database?

Answer
After installation of the latest version, connect the Nastar GSM to the local Network and run
new performance statistics query tasks, if you have created a new local network by Transdata.
If you want to upgrade these tasks in an old local network, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Select a local Network to be upgraded in the Transdata workspace.
Step 2 Open the NET menu, and then click Initial Task. Or right-click a blank area and then click
Initial Task to initialize the tasks.
After initialization, the performance statistics query tasks have been cleared in the selected
local network, and been updated into the latest version.
----End

13.3.2 How to Use the Nastar GSM Version 2.5 to Analyze the
Results Imported by the Old Nastar GSM Version?
Question
When you use the latest version (version 2.5) to analyze the results imported by the old one
(version 2.5), the interfaces of earlier-version are displayed. How to update these interfaces?

Answer
You need to update tasks. To update tasks, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Start Transdata, and then select the database NET node connected currently.
Step 2 Select Initial Task on the shortcut menu.

CAUTION
Back up the user-defined tasks before refreshing the task node.
After the tasks are refreshed, the interfaces of the latest version are displayed.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-7

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

----End

13.3.3 Importing Performance Data Error


Question
Why cannot import the performance data? After importing configuration data, the alarm
message is displayed in the output view box, and you cannot import the performance data.

Answer
You can input the SQL Server name and the related user name and password, the SQL server
name is always the computer name or IP address.
The computer is installed with two operating systems. If you log in to the SQL Server of the
Transdata is not the current operating systems sample name, the message box will be
displayed during the time of importing the performance data, as shown in Figure 13-4. In the
Network Information dialog box, the driver only has one, as shown in Figure 13-5. In this
case, you should check the server name is the name of the current operation system.
Figure 13-4 Input performance data error

Figure 13-5 Network information dialog box

13-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.3.4 Common Problems in Performance Data Import


Common problems in performance data import comprise the following parts:

Problem: 2006/06/23 10:50:47 cannot Open BSC [TEST_1_8->loudi] Private Task File
--- D:\loudic10\data\st010.tsk, Please Check.

Reason: The task definition file is not found in the pubinfo.tsk file.

Solution: Check whether this task has been registered in the BAM, the traffic statistic
file is dynamically divided by the NAConvert or by the StatTrans, and the .tsk file of
the task is removed manually.

Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:59 An item with invalid time was found in C:\Documents
and Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053\st053.IDX,skip this item.

Problem: 2006/06/23 10:57:54 File C:\Documents and


Settings\hanke\Desktop\sichuan_C13\data\st053.res Format Error! No ValueSize in
different Res file does not match the previous result will be abandoned.
Reason: The items are different in the register file.

Reason: The statistic file contains illegal data.


Solution: Check the file source.

Solution: Check whether the task changes when the BAM is running. You are advised
to import the tasks before and after the modification to avoid data loss.

Problem: task file ST 15.tsk cant match result file ST 15.res, as shown in Figure 13-6

Figure 13-6 Problem hint dialog box

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Reason: The internal data in the .tsk file does not match that in the *.res file.
Solution: For the statistic data divided by the StatTrans or the NAConvert, clear the
Verify Statistic Data checkbox during static data import and try again. If the problem
persists, check the data source.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-9

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.4 Functional Problems


13.4.1 FAQs Concerning the Comparison, Backup, and Recovery
of Project Parameters

Question

When to back up the project parameters?

Which of two copies of project parameters are to be compared?

What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on the
project parameters?

Answer

When the project parameters are imported in the last time, the system backups the
project parameter and saves the backup in the database.

By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the system compares the
current project parameter table with the last imported one and lists all addition,
deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.

CAUTION
By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to the
project parameter table that is lately imported. You should notice that the Undo Project
Parameter Modification function can disable all addition, deletion, and modification.

13.4.2 Configured Neighbor Relation

Question

When to back up the configured neighbor relation?

Which of two project parameter tables are compared by the Project Parameter
Comparative Display function?
What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on
configured neighbor relation?

13-10

Answer

When the neighbor configuration is imported for the last time, the system makes a
backup and saves the backup in the database.

By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the Nastar GSM compares the
current neighbor configuration table with the last imported one and lists all addition,
deletion, and modification records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.

By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to
the backup neighbor configuration table imported for the last time. Note that the
Undo Project Parameter Modification function can cancel all addition and deletion
operations.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.4.3 Planned Neighbor Relation

Question

When to back up the planned neighbor relation?

Which of two copies of configured neighbors are to be compared?

What operations are involved when you plan to cancel the modifications on the
project parameters?

Answer

When the neighbor planning is generated for the last time, the system backups and
saves the backup in the database.

By using the Compare Project Parameters function, the system compares the
current neighbor planning table with the one generated in the last planning, and lists
all addition and deletion records. Then, the Nastar GSM exports them to an .xls file.

By using the Undo Project Parameter Modification function, the system returns to
the neighbor table generated during the last planning. Note that the Undo Project
Parameter Modification function can cancel all addition and deletion operations.

13.4.4 Meaning of Each CI (Cell Identify)

Question
How to identify meanings of cell symbols "B", "T", and "B-T" and "T-T' in the
co-channel and adjacent channel check of the cell?

Answer
For details, see section 11.5.2 "Checking Co-Channel and Adjacent Channel. "
If BCCH and TCH both are selected in the Auto Check Channel Interface dialog box,
the system marks B, T, B-T, and T-T for the relevant co-channel and adjacent channel.
The meaning of each mark is listed as follows:

B-T: compares the values of BCCH and TCH with those of the current ARFCN. The
values of TCH indicate the lower (upper) adjacent channel of current ARFCN, while
the values of BCCH indicate upper (down) adjacent channel of current ARFCN.

T-T: compares the values of TCH between this cell and this ARFCN. Meanwhile the
values of upper and down adjacent channels are available. The values of the BCCH
indicate that it is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN.
B: indicates that the BCCH of current cell is the upper (lower) adjacent channel and
the TCH is neither adjacent nor equal to current ARFCN.
T: indicates that only one TCH value from this cell is the upper adjacent channel of
current ARFCN. The BCCH value indicates that it is neither adjacent to nor equal to
current ARFCN.

13.4.5 Selected Cells Lack Relevant Neighbors

Question
Why no corresponding neighbors of the selected cells on the map after neighbor
configuration is imported?

Answer
The problem may be caused by the following reasons:

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

The current working layer is on the automatic neighborhood planning. Click


switch to the neighborhood configuration layer.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

to

13-11

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

When the neighbor is imported, the system enables the unique matching based on
LAC+CI. Ensure that the imported project parameters of the adjacent cell inc lude
LAC+CI data. And the LAC+CI data has a unique neighbor relation.

13.4.6 Switching Between Network Optimization Operations and


Common Operations

Question
When you conduct the network optimization analys is, a map is displayed on the site view,
as shown in Figure 13-7.

Figure 13-7 Co-channel and adjacent channel check

At this time, the pointer of the mouse is a cross, indicating that network optimization
operation is complete. In such a situation, the co-channel and adjacent channel check is
being conducted.

13-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

If you need to check other parts of the map, you have to zoom in, zoom out, or move, as
shown in Figure 13-8.
Figure 13-8 Amplified map of co-channel and adjacent channel check

If you plan to continue the network optimization before executing map operations, what
should be done?

Answer
After executing the map operations, right-click on the site view. The shortcut menu is
displayed.
Click Continue Network Optimization Operation to continue the Network
optimization analysis.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Click Exit Current Operation to exit the network optimization analysis.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-13

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Figure 13-9 Site View

13.4.7 Why Cannot the Project Parameters Be Exported?

Question
Why cannot the project parameters be exported? The alert commands cannot be executed.
And the application is out of date.
Answer
Check whether the Microsoft Office Excel is overdue. If Microsoft Office Excel is
overdue, activate or reinstall Microsoft Office Excel.

13.4.8 Why Cannot a Task Be Running?

Question
Why the running of a task fails? No information about VIC cells is displayed.

Answer
An error occurs when the Nastar GSM is connected to database. Restart the Nastar GSM.

13-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.4.9 Language of Task Tree

Question
The language of the task tree does not agree with that of the main program.

Answer
If the problem described previously occurs, you can infer that the languages in the Nastar
GSM version and the Transdata version do not match. Use the right version of the
Transdata and initialize the task.

13.4.10 Incorrect Antenna Icons

Question
The antenna icons shown on the map are incorrect.

Answer
The font file is not correctly installed. Reinstall the font file.

13.4.11 Why Cannot the Workspace or Property Window Be


Displayed?

Question
The workspace or Property window is not displayed, though you have chosen the
relevant menu.

Answer
Check whether the workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border. If the
workspace or the Property window is dragged to the border, drag it back.

13.4.12 What do the Begin Time and End Time in the Network
Monitoring Report Stand For?

Question
What do Begin time and End time in the network monitoring report stand for?

Answer
The source data has a range for date. The begin date and end date clearly mark this
range.

13.4.13 What do the Statistic Begin Date and Statistic End Date in
the Network Monitoring Report Stand For?

Question
What do Statistic begin date and Statistic end date in the network monitoring report
stand for?

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Answer
When you export a report, you need to learn the range of the date. The begin date and
end date mark this. Ensure that the end date is later than the begin date.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-15

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.4.14 Description of Data Source for Channel Analysis and


Network Optimization Analysis
The functions of the channel analysis and network optimization analysis are based on project
parameters.
If project parameters are not updated, the channel analysis and network optimization analysis
are based on the previous project parameters.

13.4.15 What Problems Occur if the Project Parameters Are


Inconsistent with Configuration Parameters?

Question

What problems occur if project parameters are inconsistent with configuration


parameters?
Answer
The neighbor relation is related to the configuration parameters.
After the project parameters are imported, the configuration data fails to be imported if
the configuration data from the database is inconsistent with the project parameter.
During the download of the configuration data, the configuration data fails to be
downloaded if the configuration data in the server is inconsistent with the project
parameters.
If the configuration data fails to be imported or downloaded, and the Nastar GSM never
succeeds in importing or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration
information (such as neighbor relation) is null. If the Nastar GSM succeeds in importing
or downloading the configuration data before, the configuration is in the previous state.
This may affect the accuracy of the analysis result generated by the Neighbors Analysis
function.

13.4.16 Result of RNP Parameter Rationality Check is inconsistent


with That of Frequency Optimization Check

Question
Why the result of RNP parameter rationality check is inconsistent with that of frequency
optimization check?

Answer
Different check range

The RNP parameters rationality check checks the co-BCCH co-BSIC, whereas the
frequency optimization check checks co-BCCH co-BSIC and co-TCH co-BSIC of the
current cell
Different query object

The RNP parameters rationality check checks the configuration data imported from
the server, whereas the frequency optimization check checks the configuration data of
the local.
Inconsistent LAC and IC
The LAC and IC in the local do not match with that in the server database. Therefore,
the configuration data of the two checks is different and the check result is different.

13-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.4.17 Description of the Calculation Formula of Non-Original in


the Network Monitoring Report
Table 13-2describes the calculation formula of non-original in the network monitoring report.
Table 13-2 Calculation formula of non-original (BSC 32)
Name

ID

Target Expressions

Immediate assignment
failure

T2185 T2186

Total immediate assignment requests


Total successful immediate assignments

Immediate assignment
failure for location
update

T7283 T2187

Attempted channel seizures for location


update Total successful immediate
assignments for location update

Immediate assignment
failure for MTC

T7281 T2191

Attempted channel seizures for MTC


Total successful immediate assignments
for MTC

Immediate assignment
failure for emergency
call

T7279 T2193

Attempted channel seizures for


emergency call Total successful
immediate assignments for emergency
call

Immediate assignment
failure for
re-establishment

T7280 T2194

Attempted channel seizures for


re-establishment Total successful
immediate assignments for
re-establishment

Immediate assignment
failure (Other process)

[T7282] [T2195]
[T2189]

Attempted channel seizures for MOC


successful immediate assignments for
other procedures Successful
immediate assignments for MOC

Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers (MS
reported: Abnormal
release, unspecified)

T7198 +T7200
+T7199 +T7197
+T7205 +T7203
+T7210 +T7204
+T7202 +T7207
+T7208 +T7209
+T7211 +T7213
+T7201 +T7212
+T7206

Sum of all MS reported: Abnormal


release, unspecified

Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers
(HANDOVER
REQUIRED
REJECT)

T7222 + T7227 +
T7225 + T7219 +
T7223 + T7229 +
T7220 + T7218 +
T7231 + T7230 +
T7226 + T7221 +
T7224 + T7228

Sum of all HANDOVER REQUIRED


REJECT

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-17

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Name

ID

Target Expressions

Unsuccessful outgoing
inter-BSC inter-cell
handovers (CLEAR
COMMAND take
reason)

T7241 + T7243 +
T7240 + T7245 +
T7242 + T7244 +
T7239 + T7238

Sum of all CLEAR COMMAND take


reason

TCH Call Drop Rate


(excluding handovers)
(%)

(T2142)/
(T2105T2103T2112
T2113)

TCH Call Drop/TCH Assignment


Success Successful TCH seizures for
intra-cell handover Successful TCH
seizures for intra-BSC incoming cell
handover Successful TCH seizures for
inter-BSC incoming cell handover

13.4.18 When Using the Shortcut Key, the Displayed Dialog Box
Is Not the Related Function Dialog Box, Why?
Question
When using the shortcut key, the displayed dialog box is not the related function dialog box,
why?

Answer
In such a situation, the shortcut key may be conflicted with the runtime software of minimized
task. For example, open PowerWord, and the PowerWord is in status of getting word, the
CTRL+F12 shortcut key is use for reciting. At this time, using the CTRL+F12 shortcut key
of the Nastar GSM, the result is incorrect. Only when you close the PowerWord, the shortcut
key is effective.

13.4.19 How to Adjust Parameters That Makes the View Can


Display Antenna as the Zoom Changing?
To adjust parameters, and view can display antenna as zoom changing, perform the following
steps:
Step 1 Choose Geographic Display > Display Option > Cell Display Setting.
The Show Items Option dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-10.

13-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Figure 13-10 Show Items Option dialog box

Step 2 Select or clear the following items in the Item field to display them on the map.

Site

Site Label

Antenna

Cell Label
Sector

Step 3 Set the minimum and maximum map zooming range in the Display Area field.
If the zoom value is within the setting range, the system displays the BTS antenna. Otherwise,
the BTS antenna cannot be displayed. You can set the range based on the antenna density on
the map.
Step 4 Set the displayed color of various types of antennas in the Color Setting field.
Step 5 Click OK.
----End

Description
When the displayed area is set from minimum range 0 km to maximum range 50 km, the
antennas are displayed too dense on the map. Therefore, the cells are not very clear to be
distinguished from other cells, as shown in Figure 13-11.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-19

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Figure 13-11 Case of a too large displaying area

13-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

You can adjust the range of the displayed area. For example, set the range from minimum 0
km to maximum 25 km. Then system automatically estimates the area size and the BTS
antenna out of the range (0 km to 25 km) is not displayed, as shown in Figure 13-12.
Figure 13-12 Displaying the area range after being corrected

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-21

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.5 Others
13.5.1 Obtaining the Data from the Earlier-Version

Question

Sometimes, the on-site engineers need to use the data from the Nastar GSM of the
earlier-version. Since the database structure of the latest version has changed, you cannot
directly use the original data resource in *.mdb files.
Answer
You should first export the important data of the original database to an .xls file. Then
use the data import function provided by the Nastar GSM to import the copy of the file
to the database of the latest version.

Using the Neighbor Relation Data of Older Versions


To obtain the data of neighbor relation, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the software of earlier-version.
Step 2 Choose Neighbors Analysis > Export Neighbors, as shown in Figure 13-13.
Figure 13-13 Export Neighbors command

13-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

The Export Neighbors dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-14.


Figure 13-14 Export Neighbors dialog box

Step 3 Select Horizontal or Vertical in the area of Export Format.


Step 4 Select one or multiple items to be displayed: Cell name, LAC, CI, BCCH, or BSIC.
Step 5 Click OK to export the Adjacent Relation Table and save it in an .xls file.
Step 6 Open the software of the latest version.
Step 7 Select a neighbor file.

Import the neighbors file in horizontal format.

Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors File > Standard Format >
Horizontal, as shown in Figure 13-15.

Figure 13-15 Neighbor Analysis menu

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-23

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

The Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed, as
shown in Figure 13-16.
Figure 13-16 Please choose level adjacent relation file to import dialog box

Import the neighbors file in vertical format.

13-24

Click Open.
Choose Neighbors Analysis > Import Neighbors Files > Standard Format >
Vertical.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

The Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box is displayed,
as shown in Figure 13-17.
Figure 13-17 Please choose upright adjacent relation file to import dialog box

Click Open.

----End
NOTE

The format of the neighbor relation imported in the latest version must be consistent with that exported
in the older version. For example, if the neighbor relation is exported in horizontal format, then you
should import it in horizontal format.

Using Project Parameters


To use project parameters of earlier-versions, perform the following steps:
Step 1 Open the software of the earlier-version.
Step 2 Choose Project > Export Project Parameters.

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-25

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

The Output dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-18.


Figure 13-18 Output dialog box

Step 3 In the Output dialog box, select the parameters to be exported.


Step 4 Click OK to export the project parameter of the current project.
Step 5 Open the software of the latest version.
Step 6 Choose Project >Import Project Parameters.

13-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

The Open dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-19.


Figure 13-19 Open dialog box

Step 7 Select the project parameter table file, and then click Open.
The Select Table dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-20.
Figure 13-20 Select Table dialog box

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-27

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Step 8 Select the project parameter table to be imported, and then click OK.
The Import Setup dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 13-21.
Figure 13-21 Import Setup dialog box

----End

13.5.2 From Tab File to MapX File

Question
How to convert the Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX?

Answer
To convert Mapinfo Table file to the map file that is available to MapX, perform the
following steps:

Step 1 Find the path of MapX Common. For example, C:\Program Files\Common Files\MapInfo
Shared\MapX Common.
Step 2 Run GeosetManager50.exe.
Step 3 Create a map GeoSet.
Step 4 Add the existing tab file and import the GeoSet map file.
Step 5 Save the map file and the transformation is over.
----End

13-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

13.5.3 Implications of the Handover Indicators in the Nastar GSM

Question
Would you like to explain the implications of the handover indicators in the Nastar GSM,
since so many indicators are available?

Answer
The calculation for handover indicators is relatively complex. Table 13-3 lists the
handover success rate at the BSC level.

Table 13-3 Handover success rate


Item

Description

Level

Handover
Success Rate
(%)

([2265 Successful intra-cell handovers]+[2239


Successful incoming internal inter-cell
handovers]+[2240 Successful incoming inter
BSC inter-cell handovers])

Summed up at the cell


level

/ ([2264 Attempted intra-cell


handovers]+[2201 Attempted incoming inter
BSC inter-cell handovers]+[2200 Incoming
internal inter-cell handovers])
Intra-BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[2239 Successful incoming internal inter cell


handovers + 2243 Successful outgoing internal
inter-cell handovers + 2265 Successful
intra-cell handovers]

Summed up at the cell


level

/[2199 Attempted incoming internal inter-cell


handovers + 2204 Attempted outgoing internal
inter-cell handovers + 2264 Attempted
intra-cell handovers]
Outgoing BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 2244 Successful outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell


handovers

Incoming BSC
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 2240 Successful incoming inter-BSC


inter-cell handovers

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Summed up at the cell


level

/ 2206 Attempted outgoing inter-BSC inter-cell


handovers] * 100%
Summed up at the cell
level

/ 2201 Attempted incoming inter-BSC


inter-cell handovers] * 100%

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

13-29

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

13 FAQ

Item

Description

Level

900->1800
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 55 Successful inter-cell handovers


(900/850->1800/1900) + 69 Successful
incoming BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 94 Successful
outgoing BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900)]
/[ 52 Attempted inter-cell handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 64 Attempted
incoming BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900) + 89 Attempted
outgoing BSC handovers
(900/850->1800/1900)]

The corresponding
indicators at the cell
level are unavailable.

1800->900
Handover
Success Rate
(%)

[ 56 Successful inter-cell handovers


(1800/1900->900/850) + 70 Successful
incoming BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 95 Successful
outgoing BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850)]
/[ 53 Attempted inter-cell handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 65 Attempted
incoming BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850) + 90 Attempted
outgoing BSC handovers
(1800/1900->900/850)]

The corresponding
indicators at the cell
level are not available.

Obtain them from the


BSC overall
performance
measurement.

Obtain them from the


BSC overall
performance
measurement.

NOTE

The handover success rate at the BSC level serves as reference for the BSC overall handover. In general,
the analysis on intra BSC handover success rate, outgoing BSC handover success rate, and incoming
BSC handover success rate are enough.
The result of handover success rate summed up at the BSC level in the performance analysis is
inaccurate, because the intra BSC handover success rate sums up the handovers from cells, in addition to
the handovers to cells and intra-cell handover. The handover success rate at the BSC level in the KPI
analysis sums up the intra-cell handovers and the handovers to the cell.
In case of exceptional handover success rate, check whether the detailed indicators are registered
completely.

13-30

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

14 Acronyms and Abbreviations

14

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Table 14-1 describes the full name of each abbreviation.


Table 14-1 Abbreviations
Abbreviation

Full Name

BAM

Back Administration Module

BCC

BTS Color Code

BCCH

Broadcast Control Channel

BSC

Base Station Controller

BSIC

Base Station Identity Code

BSS

Base Station Subsystem

CHR

Call History Record

CI

Cell Identity

CPU

Center Processing Unit

CSV

Comma Separation Value

FTP

File Transfer Protocol

GByte

Gigabyte

GHz

Gigahertz

GSM

Global System for Mobile communications

GUI

Graphical User Interface

HA

High Availability

ID

Identity

IMSI

International Mobile Station Identity

IP

Internet Protocol

KPI

Key Performance Index

Issue 04 (2008-12-10)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

14-1

GENEX Nastar GSM


User Manual

14 Acronyms and Abbreviations

14-2

Abbreviation

Full Name

LAC

Location Area Code

LMT

Local Maintenance Terminate

MS

Mobile Station

MSC

Mobile Service Switching Center

MSDE

Microsoft SQL Server Desktop Engine

MB

Megabyte

NCC

Network Color Code

OMC

Operation and Maintenance Center

PC

Personal Computer

PCU

Packet Control Unit

PLS

Performance Local Server

PNS

Performance Nastar Server

QoS

Quality of Service

RNP

Radio Network Planning

SDCCH

Stand-alone Dedicated Control Channel

TA

Timing Advance

TCH

Traffic Channel

TCP

Transport Control Protocol

TMSI

Temporary Mobile Station Identity

TRX

Transceiver

VIC

Very Important Cells

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential


Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

04 (2008-12-10)

You might also like